JP7399701B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A gaming machine capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a notification display notifying that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a predetermined amount. known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-17403 Publication

The gaming machine uses specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed in various displays such as an award amount display and a notification display. Furthermore, the gaming machine displays background images corresponding to various states such as advantageous states, for example. There is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and background images.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably display a display including specific characters in relation to a background image.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
Display means;
The display means is capable of displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The display means is
The first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed when a start effect regarding the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result in the normal state. , in a subsequent period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is performed;
Displaying the second guidance in the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
not performing the first guide display when the start effect is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result in the special state;
It is possible to display a specific display in the first layer,
A specific character display can be displayed on a second layer on the front side of the first layer,
The specific character display includes a first specific character display whose display position is not changed during display, and a second specific character display whose display position is changed during display,
The first specific character display includes a first specific area surrounded by lines forming characters,
The second specific character display includes a second specific area surrounded by lines forming characters,
The specific display is not visible from the first specific area of the first specific character display,
It is characterized in that the specific display is visible from the second specific area of the second specific character display.
Moreover, the gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state) etc.), a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area. and a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51). a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and in the second display area, On the front side of the background image, it is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the awarded gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 displays the award amount on the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52). (such as being able to display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls awarded), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a predetermined amount. The notification displays include a first notification display to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" As the winning number notification display 20SHKH that informs you that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches ``1000 balls,'' it is possible to display the winning number notification display ``1000 over''. (e.g., when the number of prize balls awarded in a state of (For example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state.) The display ends when a period of time has elapsed (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display), and the characters used for the notification display are as follows: The characters are larger in size than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.), The characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). The specific character used to display the amount of application includes a specific character that is formed in a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character, etc.), and the specific character used for displaying the amount of addition includes the background image that is not visible from the specific area ( For example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK indicate that the background video is not visible from a specific area, etc.), and the specific characters used in the notification display indicate that the background video is visible from the specific area, etc. (For example, the specific characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH indicate that the background image is visible from a specific area, etc.) Furthermore, it also includes a firing means that can fire gaming media into the gaming area according to the player's operation. , the display means displays an image to cause the game medium to be launched toward the second downstream path of a first downstream path and a second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the gaming area; a guide display means for displaying a guide display prompting a user, the guide display including a first guide display and a second guide display, and the guide display means displaying a display result of the variable display as the specific display result. In a predetermined period after , the second guidance display is performed before the display of the name of the advantageous condition is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous condition. After the name display is completed, the first guide display is performed and the second guide display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guide display is ended while the second guide display is continued. , the second guidance display is continued in the special state after the control in the advantageous state has ended.

According to such a configuration, a display including a specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to a background image. Further, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction that prompts the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, during execution of a jackpot start effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-147575, a player is encouraged to shoot a game ball to the right by operating a ball shooting handle. Some were configured to give right-handed instructions. However, there is still room for improvement in the instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result, and is capable of firing game media into a game area according to the player's operation. means, and prompting the player using an image display to launch the game medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for displaying a guide, the guide display including a first guide display and a second guide display, and the guide display means displaying a display result of the variable display as the specific display result. In a subsequent predetermined period, the second guidance display is performed before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, and the display of the name of the advantageous state is performed. After completion, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued, and the advantageous The present invention is characterized in that the second guidance display continues in the special state after the state control is completed. According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which game balls are caught between special variable prize winning ball devices. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows the background art related to the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions, etc. in the first form of the characteristic section 20SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature section 20SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the performance operation of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the result display in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance period of various performances in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the performance operation example of various performances in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the ending background image in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the background art related to the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining count display in the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number notification display in the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing how the remaining number of times display is displayed in a fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic section 20SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the performance operation of the remaining number of times display and remaining number of times notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when winning a prize occurs during the round in the characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the feature section 19SH. It is a figure showing an example of presentation operation when over winning occurs in characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the feature section 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the over winning effect in the characteristic part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance operation in the case where there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred in the feature section 19SH. It is a diagram showing another example of the performance operation in the case where there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred in the feature section 19SH. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a feature of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory view showing a special figure LED board and a 4th pattern unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of production processing during jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing a lighting mode of a lamp. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a child table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory view showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during a fanfare performance due to one winning special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during one round of jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the first round of jackpot when the player wins the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during the fourth round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the fourth round of jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory diagram showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special figure 1.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is comprised of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), etc., and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. As shown, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 at the lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 at the upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 at the lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 at the upper right portion. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speaker portions 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR. There is. In addition, a general winning a prize opening vicinity lamp 9g is provided in the vicinity of the general winning a prize opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the gaming area.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. There is. In addition, these main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamps 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamps 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is based on the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right-handed hit may be performed in which the game ball is fired into the right-hand gaming area so that the game ball enters the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of won balls after a predetermined period after the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If there is no increase, a predetermined display is made to show that the number of earned balls has not increased, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g, which are lighting examples when all the game effect lamps 9 are turned on. It is a diagram. The characteristic parts 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, include a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit sequentially from the lower left to the lower right. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that he should play to the right.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start specifying command is stored in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer. It should be stored in . Thereafter, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, processing to clear the probability variation flag and time saving flag to turn them off, processing to clear the special symbol variation number counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol game in the probability variation state and time saving state, etc. It is enough if it is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step 042 AKS006), the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the jackpot flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), a performance waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, similar to the process of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS009). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either of the processes in step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure variation counter (special figure variation count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, so that the updated special figure variation count value becomes a predetermined value. A determination is made as to whether or not it matches the special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag and turning them off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, it is sufficient to maintain the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag and terminate the process of step 042AKS013. After executing the end determination of such probability change state and time saving state, the special symbol stop processing ends. In addition, the end determination based on the count value of the number of special symbol variations may be performed only in the time saving state, and in the variable probability state, it may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". . Alternatively, for example, the variable state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the variable state from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, and referring to a table for determining the end of the variable state stored in advance in the ROM 101, etc. Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to do so.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot release pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot start time flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start performance is on standby (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", a predetermined timer initial value is Set in the gaming control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the jackpot start performance is on standby. , in response to a match, it may be determined that the jackpot start performance is not on standby.

If in step 042AKS022 the game is waiting for the performance at the start of the jackpot (step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot release pre-processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 042AKS022 that the jackpot start time performance is not on standby (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the number of times the jackpot opening opening counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), reads the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 (Step 042AKS026), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value. In the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type, but for example, if there is a jackpot type of "suddenly certain", a jackpot of "probable variation" or "non-probable variation" is set. It is only necessary to set an open control pattern different from the type. In addition, even if the jackpot type is "probable variable" or "non-probable variable," for example, different release control patterns are set for the jackpot types of "probable variable 1" and "probable variable 2." It may be set to a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting until the big prize opening is opened in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether the game control process timer value matches the next release waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next release is waiting. For example, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for the next release. If the game is waiting for the next release at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process advances to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not on standby (step 042AKS027; No), the grand prize opening is opened in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the grand prize opening number counter. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the opening time of the big winning hole is set in the game control process timer, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning prize. A grand prize opening time is set, which is the upper limit of the time for which the opening is kept open. In addition, for example, by starting outputting a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid is turned on to open the large winning opening. Settings are made to set the status.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value in the grand prize opening number counter is "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the grand prize opening opening time is set by the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a large prize opening designation command to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process. After updating to 5'' (step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening ends.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot opening process. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot by, for example, determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If the game ball does not enter the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening at step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the grand prize opening. A setting is made to transmit a winning designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated number-of-winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (Step 042AKS043; No), after decrementing the game control process timer value by 1 and updating it (Step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value has been met (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process during opening of the big winning hole is ended.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated number of winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened in step 042AKS045. If it is determined that (Step 042 AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined large winning hole door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning hole is closed. The solenoid for the big prize opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning prize count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command after opening the big winning hole to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set after the opening of the big winning hole. After updating the value to "6" corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the jackpot opening process is ended.

In this way, the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 10-2, the jackpot release pre-process shown in Figure 10-3, the jackpot release process shown in Figure 10-4, etc. (including the jackpot release post-process, jackpot end process, etc.) By being executed, the transmission settings of various performance control commands such as a winning start designation command, a command to designate when the big winning hole is open, a winning designation command, and a command to specify after opening the big winning hole are performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. , grasps the timing such as the start of the jackpot, opening of the jackpot (start of round) and closing (end of round), entry into the jackpot, end of jackpot, etc.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the jackpot production processing of step S176 in FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). The winning end designation command is executed on the main board when it is determined in the jackpot release post-processing in step S116 in FIG. This is a command sent from the 11 side, and is a command for ending the jackpot performance and executing the ending performance.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS051; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since starting the nth R (nR predetermined period elapsed). Determination is made (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and with an initial value of "1", it is sequentially incremented by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nRth round when the timer value becomes "0". More specifically, in response to the fact that the grand prize opening has become completely open (that is, it has been detected that the grand prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open), the main board 11 side A command for specifying that the big prize opening is open is transmitted, and counting of the timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the round game of the first round has started, the number of acquired balls display that is the display of the number of balls acquired and the round number that indicates the number of rounds is displayed. Display is performed. On the production control board 12 side, during the period from when a jackpot is reached to when it ends (period from fanfare to ending), each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the jackpot is received, the number of wins is calculated. The process of adding 15 is continued. When the production control board 12 receives the winning designation command, it must first analyze the command, add up the number of wins, and display the added number of wins. It takes a predetermined period of time to display the information. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processing will not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round round game until the elapse of the predetermined period, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , even if a player has won a prize, the process of displaying "0015" may not be able to keep up ("0015" is displayed after "0000" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, 0.6 seconds is set as the predetermined period, and if the game ball that is present at the top of the grand prize opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period is ensured in which "0015" is directly displayed instead of "0000" being displayed as the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when firing continuously, and the period from firing until entering the big prize slot is set to 0.6 seconds. Even taking into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls that are continuously fired to enter the big winning hole is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening will be one from when the grand prize opening is opened until the number of winnings is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of wins from increasing in the state before the number of wins or the number of rounds is displayed, causing the number of wins to be displayed at the timing when the number of rounds starts to be displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although an example has been shown in which the predetermined period in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round or not. Determination is made (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and as described above, the initial value is set to "1", and is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, and is set to "1" in step 042AKS068. cleared. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether n=1 by checking the value of n.

If it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed performance that suggests to the player that he should play right-handed, and also suggests that a jackpot gaming state has been reached. The operation of the fanfare performance is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R. The operation of the jackpot performance is controlled (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, a round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot performance corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the process of step 042AKS056, winnings are determined for a predetermined period after starting the nR. If the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening within a predetermined period after starting the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 calculates the count value of the number of balls won. is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). Note that the count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive games, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end of the consecutive games. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the performance control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during the jackpot performance, for example. It emits light in a manner that notifies you of what has happened. Therefore, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time may be greater during the winning time and during the jackpot performance. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the winning sound is output in addition to making the attacker lamp 9c emit light, regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period or not. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are ended. On the other hand, if n≠1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the updated display (step 042AKS060), various display processing ends. In addition, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, when performing the update display of the number of acquired balls in the process of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 as is, the count value of the number of acquired balls is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in 12(a-23), a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of acquired balls will increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the nth R (step 042AKS052; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nth R and the number of acquisitions. At the same time, the operation control of the n-th jackpot performance is performed (step 042AKS061). When n=1, that is, when it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of wins is incremented by 15 in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, ) As shown in Figure 10-11 (a-21), the number of wins has not increased in this jackpot after the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins has increased) is performed. Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the prescribed display (as a specific display) (if you are playing consecutive games, count the display of adding "15" to the number of wins from the previous jackpot) You can do this after uploading). On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the jackpot before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current jackpot, so the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings does not increase in the current jackpot. -22), as a predetermined display, the number of wins is displayed (displaying "0000") to indicate that the number of wins has not increased (if you are playing consecutive games, the number of wins from the previous jackpot remains the same). display). In addition to "0000" as the acquisition number display (predetermined display) to indicate that the acquisition number has not increased, a non-numeric display such as "---" or "not increased" may be used. You can do it like this. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern according to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 may be switched alternately. The display effect lamps 9 are turned on to emit more light than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety. It is possible to liven up the performance and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the performance effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the jackpot, the performance can be excited at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063), The attacker playing card 9c is made to emit light, and a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, and a count-up display (display notifying that the winning number is increasing) is performed, and then the winning number update display is performed to display the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R, which is the next round after the nR, has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042 AKS065, the determination may be made based on, for example, whether or not a large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received from the main board 11 side. If the (n+1)th R has not started, that is, if the grand prize opening designation command has not been received and the nth R remains (step 042 AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as is. . On the other hand, when the (n+1)th R starts, that is, when the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the (n+1) R is received (Step 042AKS065; Yes), "1" is added to n (Step 042AKS066), and various display processing is performed. end. For example, if n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that although n=2 and it is the second round, until the predetermined period has passed, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round, which is the n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (displayed in the process of step 042AKS061 after determining Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to end the jackpot performance corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending performance (step 042AKS051; Yes). 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processing.

Next, the display timing of displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of acquisitions, etc. and examples of performance operations will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. In the illustrated example, the case is not during a consecutive game, but is a so-called first hit (first jackpot).

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. FIGS. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing examples of performance operation displays, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game state is entered. At this stage, the grand prize opening is in a closed state as shown in FIG. 10-7 (b-1). In addition, in order to notify the player of the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-1), a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable lamp 9d, a speaker lamp 9eL, Various performance effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning a prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is a performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is a performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in Figure 10-6, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to notify the player that they should play right-handed until the end of the predetermined period of the first round (Figure 10-6). 5, step 042AKS054). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is a period that is sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-2), All the production effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in this order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center part, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-hand hitting effect is performed in which "hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the image display device. Note that the small right-hitting display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be continuously displayed during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed performance, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (a-3) to 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 displays the "right-handed hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the production effect lamps 9 will be explained below. When the right-handed performance starts, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3), the general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the gaming area lights up first, and then the lamp 9g in the vicinity of the general winning hole lights up, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, is lit. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in Figure 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up, and as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L part lights up. 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko game machine 1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), since the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the ejected game media does not enter the grand prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the fired game ball passes through the second path in the upper part of the big prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided at the upper center portion of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the performance effect lamp 9 provided at the upper center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R part lights up, and then, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right part 9 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the right display device Lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right portion, lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, the effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, then to the center part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the effect lamp 9 lights up the player's right hand. There will be a right-handed performance that suggests. In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which both the production effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 were used to suggest right-handed play. It may be. In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights up from the lower left side to the center to the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights up from the lower left side to the center and right side. Both may be turned on independently, at the same time or with a time difference, such as in the downward direction.

After the right-handed performance on the performance effect lamps 9 is completed, all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hitting display on the image display device 5 continues to be performed (the right-hitting effect itself is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the opening timing of the big winning hole comes, the 1st R is started, and the big winning hole is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 continues, and until a predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16). As shown, all the production effect lamps 9 remain off (the same applies up to FIGS. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all of the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indicators such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-16), even after the big prize opening is opened, until the predetermined period elapses, Figures 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting. In this case, the lighting speed of each production effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the grand prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the changing speed may be made faster). In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to leave the light on instead of turning it off. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big prize opening is in the open state.

Then, when the grand prize opening is completely opened as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R is started, and as shown in Figure 10-10 As shown in (b-18), when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the production control board 12 side. In addition, for game balls that are fired due to a right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening will be in the open state. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing when , it becomes possible to win within the predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R. On the side of the production control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18) through the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). As shown in , the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. As described above, the attacker lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during a jackpot performance, for example. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the fired game ball passes through the first route, which is the route in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning route where the count switch 23 is provided. An example is shown below. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time required for the counting switch 23 to detect the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game without making him feel anxious. It can be prevented.

As shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), after the game ball enters the big winning hole, or after the game ball enters the grand prize slot as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), time elapses without winning, and as shown in Figure 10- 10(a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), when the predetermined period of time has passed, the round number display and jackpot effect corresponding to the 1st R will be displayed as shown in FIG. 10-6. Since it is the execution timing and the acquisition number display execution timing, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20), A round number display of "1R" indicating one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20). , and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot displayed as the jackpot performance (first R performance) and the display of "BOUNUS in progress" are not shown (the same applies to Figures 10-20, which will be described later). As shown in 10-21, it is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right. Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed performance is performed and a predetermined period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), as a jackpot performance, As shown in (A-2), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, is displayed facing forward, and is placed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-3), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, is tilted toward the back right, and the "BOUNUS in progress" display changes to "7". A star-shaped image moves to the top of "O". Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-4), the "7" symbol that constitutes the jackpot faces forward, and a star appears above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. Images of shapes shift. After that, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, becomes tilted toward the back left, and the "U" of the "BOUNUS in progress" display appears. A star-shaped image moves to the top of ``. Then, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is the decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, faces forward again, and a star appears above the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, during the jackpot production, the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot move toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and a star-shaped image moves from the left character of the "BOUNUS" display to the right. By shifting the , it is suggested to the player that he should play right. The motion display of decorative patterns that make up a jackpot and the transition display of star-shaped images are called effect displays.In addition to this, effect displays include, for example, a predetermined image rotating clockwise, or a character gradually changing. This includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, making it easier to recognize that the player should hit the ball to the right.

In addition, during the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern set in advance according to the jackpot performance. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the grand prize opening is in the open state and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without the game ball entering the grand prize opening, the count-up display will not be performed and the number of acquisitions will be displayed as "0000" as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-22). is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to a preset light emission pattern according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes and as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round, the upper limit to which the grand prize opening can be opened. period. In addition, in conjunction with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in Figure 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-23), and the count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-24). As shown in the figure, the number of acquisitions "0150" is displayed. In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, the winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-23). ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. In addition, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is a sufficient period even if counted from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, this is a sufficient period for winning 10 prizes. Therefore, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

When the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1R, the maximum period in which the grand prize opening can be opened is reached. It is controlled to be in a closed state. After that, until the 2nd R shown in FIG. 10-6 starts, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-25). , the jackpot effect continues to be performed (the display of the number of wins is updated according to the winnings), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the jackpot effect as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-25). and lights up.

In addition, when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize opening. A so-called over-win may occur in which the player enters the grand prize opening after the 10th game ball. Even in the case of over-winning, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of wins of "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that an over-win has occurred in the first round, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is difficult to determine which one is the winning number corresponding to the opening of the round. It becomes easier. Further, the winning sound corresponding to an over winning sound may be a sound different from a normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, if the count value exceeds the upper limit value of "10" and the winning is achieved, the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also be caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to an over-winning mode, unlike the light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, in response to the second round, as shown in Figure 10-6, the big winning opening becomes open again, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-26), the big winning opening opens again. controlled to become In this case, it is determined Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 10-5, that is, the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n=2. Become. At this stage, the process of step 042AKS055 in Figure 10-5 is executed, so as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the jackpot effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the 1R are shown. A display is made (see also Figure 10-6).

Next, when the grand prize opening is completely opened and the game ball enters the grand prize opening as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, the step shown in Figure 10-5 is In the process of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and an acquired number of "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, the winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (c-27). ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the prize is won during the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the "2R ” is displayed, and a jackpot effect corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" has been displayed continuously since the first round. Moreover, the display of "1R" continues to be displayed until the second R predetermined period has elapsed. In addition, the feature section 042AK of this embodiment shows an example in which a common jackpot effect is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The presentation during the jackpot may be different. The same applies to lighting of the production effect lamp 9. In this way, since the grand prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating that it is the second round, the game ball of the player who has been firing continuously since the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the grand prize opening is controlled to open in response to the 2nd R, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (a-29). 10-14 (a-31 ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions obtained in the 1st R continues to be displayed. Thereafter, the same process is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. 10-5, a jackpot performance corresponding to the round is performed to perform the ending performance. Configure settings to terminate. In this way, from the second round onward, if you do not win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, but if you win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed will continue to be displayed. , the number of acquired balls is added to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent rounds.

For example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize hole. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A winning game ball occurs. In this case, as shown in Figure 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify that the prize has been won, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20) and As shown in (a-21), after performing a count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquisition number display. In addition, in such a case, there is a possibility that the fired game ball will win an additional prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the game ball shown in Figure 10-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after performing a count-up display, it is sufficient to display "0030" directly as the acquisition number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase the interest in the game.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If the game ball does not enter the grand prize slot within a predetermined period after the first round has started, a predetermined display is made after the predetermined period to indicate that the number of wins has not increased, and If the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after one round has started, the number of wins is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, the production control CPU 120 directly specifies the winning number without displaying the number of wins of "0000" as a predetermined display. A display of the number of acquisitions of "0015" is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent confusion from being caused to the players and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display to notify that the number of wins will increase if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , displays the acquisition number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a winning and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the opening of the opening that is transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the opening of the opening. The number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 allows the launched game balls to pass through the second route at the upper part of the grand prize opening door and guide them to the ejection path by keeping the grand prize opening door in a closed state. By opening the winning opening door, the fired game balls are guided to the big winning opening through a first route and detected by a count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the counting switch 23 detects the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period of time. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, and the player can enjoy the game without feeling anxious. It is possible to prevent a decrease in

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed hit as shown in FIG. By performing a performance, it is displayed to the player that he should hit the ball to the right. According to this, since the game area to be fired during a jackpot is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and the big winning opening door is completely open. In response to detecting that the main board 11 has moved to a completely open position, a command to designate the opening of the big prize opening is transmitted from the main board 11 side. According to this, since a predetermined period of time is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, for game balls that are fired due to the right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening is in the open state. If there is a prize at the top of the big prize opening at the timing when Displays the number of acquisitions as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

Also, for example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, when the 11th game ball enters the grand prize hole As shown in Figure 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A game ball wins, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a fanfare performance indicating that a jackpot game state has been entered until the big prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state. Then, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the round number is displayed together with the winning number, and it is possible to execute a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). In addition, as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), even if a game ball enters the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp will appear as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to visually recognize that a prize has been won within a predetermined period of time. It becomes easier.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. The device emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the light is emitted per hour (a manner that notifies winnings). According to this, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening becomes open, the production control CPU 120 controls the A winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even if a game ball wins in the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is outputted. According to this, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning successive game balls into a grand prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium does not enter the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, the production control CPU 120 controls the As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the winning number display that was displayed in the previous round game continues to be displayed, and the gaming medium enters the corresponding grand prize slot within the specified period. As shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the number of acquired balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed from the acquired number displayed in the previous round game. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big prize opening even in the second round and onwards.

Furthermore, even when an over-win occurs, for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and displays the number of wins of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, since the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big prize opening, in a situation where the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as in Figure 10-11 (c-20) and ( c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and more The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel anxious, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance that follows, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the right-handed performance and the fanfare performance before the start of the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) to suggest a right-handed hit. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect provided on the game board 2 The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed hitting using the production effect lamp 9. In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). Instead of turning off the light, the light may be left on as it is. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big prize opening is in the open state.

Furthermore, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if counted after the predetermined period has elapsed for 10 game balls to win. According to this, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is not turned on until the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). let According to this, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance effect lamp 9 to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance after a predetermined period has elapsed. let According to this, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the jackpot performance is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, the production control CPU 120 displays an effect display that transitions and displays decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot, suggesting a right-handed hit. Do it in a certain manner. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should play to the right, making it easier for the player to recognize that the player should play to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 light up in order to suggest that you should hit the ball to the right. Although an example has been shown in which all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed performance using the performance effect lamps 9 is finished, this is just one example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10-16 (c-16A), at the timing when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the big prize opening is in the open state. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may continue to be lit until a predetermined period of time has elapsed or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , "R" is displayed continuously from the first round, and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R has passed, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in Figure 10-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big prize opening becomes closed, the display of "1" of the display of "1R" is erased. , only "R" may be displayed. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and a round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, it is possible to visually confirm the end of each round, and it is possible to add variety to the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of winnings that becomes the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit number of winnings is 10), but for example, if the upper limit winnings is 1, , it may be arranged so that if two pieces are won during a predetermined period before the round number is displayed, the winning is over. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also be made to emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over winning. .

In addition, in the above embodiment, regarding the number of wins displayed, an example was shown in which winnings of game balls into the big winning hole are counted, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Good too. In addition, since right-handed hitting is performed during the jackpot, the general winning hole that wins the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that description of parts similar to those in FIG. 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the general winning prize indicating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 is further shown. It is determined whether the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls acquired ( Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process moves to step 042AKS059. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042 AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS062; No), it is further shown that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether a general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won ( Step 042AKS083), and the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (Step 042AKS085). When displaying the updated number of acquisitions in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions has increased) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process moves to step 042AKS065. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of the performance operation in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 are also counted will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams illustrating display examples of performance operations, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 10-19 are ( Same as a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the grand prize opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball enters the general winning hole 10 as shown in Figure 10-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in Figure 10-19 (b-17), the game ball also enters the general winning hole 10. If time passes without any winnings in the winning slot 10, and a predetermined period of time passes as shown in Figures 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball will be awarded a general prize. If a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in Figures 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , a round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is also performed. Also, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , and characters are displayed. In the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquisition number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball entering the general winning hole 10, as shown in FIG. " is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is performed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emitting pattern set in advance according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined winning hole will be closed in the same way as in the above embodiment. After the period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the number of wins in response to winnings in the general winning hole 10. In addition, when no game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, since the number of winnings corresponding to the winnings is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent players from feeling anxious.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value that is awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( For example, displaying the number of wins), a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. After the winning amount has elapsed, the award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning amount is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of wins), and the If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display if the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. (For example, instead of displaying "0000", "0015" may be displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion among players and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is configured to provide the gaming value when the gaming medium enters the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. After performing a count-up display indicating ``0015'', a display corresponding to the gaming value given as the specific display is performed (for example, a count-up display is performed to notify that the number of acquisitions will increase, and then ``0015'' is displayed) ).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins increases.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means may display a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. Start displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed after reception (for example, start counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing when the big prize opening designation command transmitted from the main board 11 side is received) etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means is configured to lead the gaming medium to a winning path (for example, a large winning path) by being in the first state. By opening the winning slot door, the ejected game ball passes through the first route and is guided to the big winning slot, etc.), and by entering the second state, the game medium is guided to the discharge route. A route forming means including two routes (for example, by closing the grand prize opening door, the launched game ball passes through a second route in the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge route) and a detection means (for example, count switch 23, etc.) that is formed in the winning route and detects winning of the game medium, and the time from the route forming means to the detection means for the game medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning opening door part is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present above the grand prize opening will be detected within a predetermined period of time after the grand prize opening is opened, and the game enjoyment can be improved without giving the player a sense of anxiety. The decline can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, the player Perform an operation promotion display to promote operation (for example, after a jackpot is achieved and until the jackpot is opened, a right-handed effect is performed as shown in Figure 10-7 (a-3), so that the game can be played. (e.g., displaying to the player that he or she should hit the ball with the right hand).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and the big winning opening door is completely open. In response to detecting that the opening has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 may send a large prize opening specifying command.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation promotion display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the ejected game medium wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the game ball is ejected by performing a right-handed performance before the start of the first round) However, it is possible to win at the timing when the big prize opening is opened, and if the prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent game media fired before a round game is started from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means When changing from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium being sandwiched (for example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is a special variable winning ball as shown in FIG. 10-15). (e.g., the jackpot game state ends while the player is stuck in the device 7 (more specifically, between the jackpot door and the glass door frame 3a), and the first round game when the jackpot game state is controlled again to the advantageous state. If the game medium in the sandwiched state wins a prize in the variable winning means by changing the variable winning means from the second state to the first state, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed ( For example, when the next jackpot occurs, the game ball enters the jackpot at the start of the first round, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the period is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests that the control has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare performance that suggests that the jackpot gaming state has entered the state until the big winning opening changes from the closed state to the open state) can be executed. (such as possible), and at the same time as the display of the award amount starts to be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game display that can identify the round game being executed and an in-round effect corresponding to the round game can be executed. (For example, after the jackpot is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of wins, and it is possible to perform a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game.)

According to such a configuration, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and,
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, (such as a CPU 103 that plays a round game), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value that is awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game) displaying a number, etc.), after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. The award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and the game medium enters the variable prize means within the predetermined period. If not, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been provided is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the predetermined period is If the game medium wins within the variable prize winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display, etc.). , further comprising a light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means controls the game medium after the predetermined period has elapsed. Controlling the light emitting means in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium in the case where the winning means is won by the variable winning means and in the case where the game medium is won in the variable winning means before the elapse of the predetermined period ( For example, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and also when a prize is won within a predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means. etc.) and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, the light emission of the specific light emitting means is , the number of times of light emission per unit time is greater than the light emission of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), the game other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the jackpot performance The effect lamp 9 may emit light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the effect lamp 9 emits light per unit time (a manner that notifies that a prize has been won), etc.).

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above further includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is configured to operate when a game medium wins a prize in the variable prize winning means. A winning sound corresponding to a winning is output, and even if the game medium enters the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed, or if the gaming medium enters the variable winning means before the predetermined period elapses, the entered prize is output. It is also possible to output a sound (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening, a winning sound is output regardless of whether or not the prize is won within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (such as the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (such as the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( (e.g., displaying the number of rounds obtained), it is possible to display a round game display that allows identification of the round game being executed (e.g., displaying the number of rounds), and the first round among the plurality of round games. When a game is played, the award amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened), and the number of rounds won is displayed after the second round among the plurality of round games. When a game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second and subsequent round games is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the grand prize opening is opened.) If the game medium does not enter the variable prize means within the predetermined period, the predetermined period After the elapsed time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been provided is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display, etc.), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is changed to the variable amount. When a prize is won by the prize winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

According to this configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and also to , it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the second and subsequent round games are played, a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. If the game medium does not enter the variable prize winning means within the period, the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed (for example, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, If the game medium does not enter the grand prize hole within a predetermined period after the grand prize hole is opened, as shown in Figure 10-14 (a-31), if the game medium is not entered into the big prize hole, the information displayed in the previous round game will be displayed. within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the second and subsequent round games are played (such as continuously displaying the number of wins obtained). If the game medium wins in the variable winning means, the amount awarded according to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning is added from the amount displayed in the previous round game. (For example, if the game medium enters the corresponding big prize slot within a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game will be changed to , the number of acquired balls awarded in response to the winning is added and displayed), etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning hole even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is capable of updating and displaying the award amount display that is being displayed in response to winning of a gaming medium in the variable winning means. After the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state, the updating display of the awarded amount display ends before the variable winning means returns to the first state again (for example, when the big winning opening is completely closed). (For example, the count-up display and the display of the number of winnings corresponding to the over winnings may be completed within a period from when the winning state is closed to when the winning state is opened corresponding to the second round.)

According to this configuration, the update of the number of wins displayed at the time of one release does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed at the next release, making it easy to determine which release corresponds to the winning number. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (such as the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays content on the display means (such as the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( For example, displaying the number of wins), a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. After the winning amount has elapsed, the award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning amount is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of wins), and If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the win number display) etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is the variable winning means. is in the first state and the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed is better than when the variable winning means is in the first state and the award amount display is displayed before the predetermined period has elapsed. Control is performed to cause more light emitting means to emit light than when is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18) , in a situation where the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening, but the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as shown in Figure 10-11 (c-20) As shown in (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and during a predetermined period It is characterized by the fact that many production effect lamps 9 emit light, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance after the game is performed, and to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation promotion display that encourages the player to perform the operation is displayed. The light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c, etc.) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means. ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when the variable prize winning means is in the first state, the light emitting means before the predetermined period elapses. When the applied amount display is not displayed, the specified light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the operation promotion display while causing the specific light emitting means to emit light, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the applied amount display is displayed. 10-7 (c-3), the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the big prize opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, ) ~ As shown in Figure 10-9 (c-13), the production effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time, for example, as shown in Figure 10-11 (c-20) and (c -21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are lit alternately, and the grand prize opening is opened. If the production effect lamps 9 are to be lit in sequence later to suggest a right-handed hit, after the last attacker lamp 9c is lit, it is not turned off and remains lit as shown in Figure 10-9 (c-15). (e.g.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to promote the operation using the predetermined light emitting means, and it is also possible to make the player aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the round game ends when a certain number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game. (For example, when 10 game balls win, it becomes the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened.) The time is sufficient for the game media to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the grand prize opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count from the elapse of the predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) period), etc.

According to this configuration, sufficient time is ensured for winning a prize, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, one of the round games ends when a specific number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, when 10 game media are won). The period from when the predetermined period elapses until the variable winning means enters the second state is the period when the game medium is in the second state. It is enough time to win a certain number of prizes (for example, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if you count from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display before the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the award after the predetermined period has elapsed. After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed, As shown in c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in Figs. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time is displayed. (e.g., causing the production effect lamp 9 to emit light from the scene).

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. A round game in which it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the following (for example, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect), and the round game being executed can be identified at the same time as the display of the award amount display starts after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to execute an in-round effect corresponding to the display and the round game (for example, displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of acquisitions, and performing a jackpot effect after a predetermined period has elapsed), and at the same timing as the execution timing of the in-round effect. The light emitting means is caused to emit light at a timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance, etc.) , it may be done as follows.

According to this configuration, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance is executed during the round, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, further comprising general winning means (for example, general winning opening 10, etc.) in which game media can be won, and the display means It is possible to display the amount of gaming value awarded when a gaming medium is won in the general winning means as the awarded amount display (for example, in response to a winning in the general winning slot 10, an acquisition number display is displayed). etc.), if the game medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed ( For example, if a game ball does not enter the general winning hole 10 within a predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded), If a prize is won in the general winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the fact that the prize has been won in the general winning means is displayed as the award amount display (for example, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened). If a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 in Good too.

According to this configuration, since a display corresponding to winning in the general winning means is also displayed regarding winnings in the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent anxiety from being caused to the player.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the gaming area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the gaming area on the right side). The display means is capable of displaying a first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the award amount display, and the first image is displayed during the advantageous state. An effect is displayed at the same timing as the award amount display (for example, an effect display that moves decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is displayed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, an effect display For example, the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot may be displayed in a manner suggesting a right-handed hit by moving them toward the back right, the front, and the back left.

According to this configuration, the game area where the shot should be fired is suggested by the effect display, making it easier for the player to recognize the game area where the shot should be fired.

(Explanation regarding the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is displayed, and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is notified that the number of prize balls awarded has reached a predetermined number. It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display. The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and notifying the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the number of wins are such that the background image during the jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area. The specific characters used to display the number of wins are visible from the specific area during the jackpot background image.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the first form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating background technology related to the first form of the feature section 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled in the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the pachinko gaming machine may display an acquisition number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the number of acquired balls is displayed as "points 120" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

The number of acquired balls is displayed using numbers for displaying the number of prize balls and characters other than numbers for recognizing that the number of balls won is displayed. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The acquired number display shown in Figure 11-1 (A) has the word "point" to remind you that it is a acquired number display, and the number "120" to display the number of prize balls. It is used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by lines forming characters, and is an area that does not communicate with areas outside the lines forming characters. Here, ``not communicating with the area outside the lines forming the characters'' means that the ``specific area'' is completely isolated from the ``area outside the lines forming the characters'' by the ``lines forming the characters.'' In other cases, the ``specific area'' is not completely separated by the ``line forming the characters'' from the ``area outside the lines forming the characters,'' but it appears to be a separate area at first glance. ,including. In the following description, a character in which a specific area is formed will be referred to as a "specific character."

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific region is a substantially circular region surrounded by curved lines forming the characters. Two specific areas are formed for the Arabic numeral "8". In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the specific region is a triangular region surrounded by three straight lines forming the character.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a jackpot background image in which a "butterfly" is flying is displayed. The jackpot background image is an image that is displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the jackpot game state. The background video during the jackpot includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The acquisition number display is displayed in a small size in the end area of the display area of the image display device that does not obstruct the visibility of the background image during the jackpot. When the jackpot background image changes over time, the line of the jackpot background image may overlap with the back of the winning number display. If a specific character is displayed on the winning number display, the jackpot will appear on the back of the specific area of the specific character, like the "0" part of the Arabic numeral surrounded by the two-dot chain line in Figure 11-1 (A). When the lines of the medium background image overlap, the lines of the jackpot medium background image may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character.

FIG. 11-1(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A). In the example shown in Figures 11-1 (A) and (B), the line of the "butterfly" in the jackpot background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of acquisitions. During the jackpot, the ``butterfly'' line in the background image is assimilated with the line forming the specific character ``0,'' making the specific character ``0'' look like the Arabic numeral ``8'' instead of the Arabic numeral ``0''.

In this way, if the characters in the acquired number display are mistakenly recognized as characters different from the original characters, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the jackpot background image so that the line of the jackpot background image does not overlap with a specific area of a specific character.

The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH was created in view of this background. The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Display of the number of acquisitions in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions is , is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-2 (A), the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS1 used to display the number of acquisitions is "black", while the specific characters "0", "4", "6" ”, “8”, and “9” specific areas 20SHI1 are displayed in “white”.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters, but the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters, but the display mode of the characters is Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed.

For example, it is sufficient that the color of the specific area 20SHI1 has a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture with a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Among the characters used to display the number of balls won, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the number of prize balls and specific characters other than numbers to recognize that the number of balls won are shown in Figure 11- Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2(A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Obtainment number notification display in the first form of the characteristic section 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

When the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays an acquired number notification display to notify that fact.

Here, the time saving control and probability change control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state are such that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times, or the jackpot game state is changed before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. However, for example, the number of times of time saving control and probability changing control may be different for each type of jackpot, or in the case of a specific jackpot type, the number of times of time saving control and probability varying control may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. The accuracy control and time saving control may be continuously executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state until a jackpot occurs again. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without intervening the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive game state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a consecutive game state, when the number of prize balls awarded in multiple jackpot game states in the consecutive game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display to notify that fact. do.

The acquisition number notification display includes a number to display the predetermined number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is the acquisition number notification display. and are used. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the first form of the feature section 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), a specific area of a specific character used for displaying the acquisition number notification is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in Figure 11-2 (B), among the Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters are specified. The area 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is reached, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the predetermined number, or the acquisition number notification display. Specific characters other than numbers for recognition are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, like the Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 11-2(B).

(How the acquired number display looks in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-3(A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 11-3(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A).

In the example shown in Figures 11-3 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" line of the jackpot background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the jackpot cannot be viewed from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during the jackpot is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately represented as the Arabic numeral "0". can be recognized.

In addition to the acquisition number display 20SHK, the image display device 5 also displays a jackpot display 20SHO to make the user recognize that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled, and a jackpot combination derived and displayed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A decorative pattern display 20SHZ showing the confirmed decorative pattern, a round number display 20SHR showing the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right-handed display 20SHM indicating to the player that he should play right-handed are displayed. has been done. The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are also placed in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 that does not obstruct the visibility of the background image during a jackpot, similar to the number of wins display 20SHK. displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and acquisition number display. It may also include characters of a different type from the characters used for the number notification display. In this embodiment, the characters of the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH use "numbers" and "katakana" as shown in FIG. 11-4. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji" which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. Further, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ uses "numbers", which are the same type of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. In addition, the round number display 20SHR has "numbers" that are the same type of characters as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the characters that are different from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. "Alphabet", which is a type of character, is used. Furthermore, the right-handed display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols" that are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM, there are characters that correspond to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific areas of specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI1 of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed, the background image during the jackpot cannot be viewed from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of displaying the number of acquisitions and displaying the number of acquisitions notification.

In this embodiment, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A). A second display area 20SH52, which is narrower than 20SH51, is distinguished from each other to perform various displays. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays the background image during the jackpot in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number display 20SHK on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a jackpot display, a decorative symbol display, a round number display, and a right hit display.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 11-4 (A), since "990 points" and the acquired number display 20SHK are displayed, it is easy to recognize that 990 game balls were paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The performance control CPU 120 updates the number of the acquired number display 20SHK every time a game ball is paid out in the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that game balls enter the grand prize opening and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the fact that 15 game balls have been paid out, the production control CPU 120 changes the number of acquired number display 20SHK from "990" as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B) to (G). Count up by 1 until "1005". In that case, the number in the acquired number display 20SHK will go through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a round number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000," the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display saying "over 1000," and when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "2000," ”, a display indicating the number of acquisitions “over 2000” is displayed.

When the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1000" of Kiriban, the production control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification on the right end of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (D). A part of display 20SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number displayed in each frame of the video while the number of the acquired number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number on the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1005," the performance control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (G). The notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

Through such display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (H), the performance control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move it towards the left edge of the area.

Through such display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and is stopped when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The performance control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and from that timing, the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is started. Display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the number of acquisitions has elapsed.

As described above, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to 11-4(H), the jackpot background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character used in the winning number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to (H), the jackpot background image is visible from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0" which is a specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

Furthermore, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (D) to (H).

Note that the presentation mode when stopping and displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the mode in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is brought into the frame, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of displaying the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH in the frame, the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may pop out from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen, or the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may gradually come out. Alternatively, a character may appear and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed in a speech bubble showing the character's lines. Also, instead of the effect of causing the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to go out of frame, it may be possible to create an effect in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may gradually disappear. It may be an effect such that when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a speech bubble indicating the character's dialogue, the character leaves.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the acquired number on the front side of the background image during the jackpot to notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display saying "1000 over", and the prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display a display indicating the number of obtained "over 2000". The acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK make it impossible to see the background image during the jackpot from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH allow the background image during the jackpot to be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and is not specified. If the jackpot background image is visible from a specific area of the character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but the jackpot background image is made invisible from the specific area of the specific character. This allows specific characters to be recognized accurately. In addition, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display 20SHK, but is displayed when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period to congratulate the winner, and since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, the background image during the jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific letters. By doing so, it becomes possible to show even a little of the background image during the jackpot in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Further, as described above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped from the winning number display 20SHK.

Furthermore, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". .

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right hit display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are the same type of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and This includes characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, and all types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM make the jackpot background image invisible from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, specific characters can be accurately recognized also in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can stop and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51, and can frame the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is caused to frame out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the second form of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 to 11-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH, the specific characters used in the win number notification display 20SHKH are more specific to the specific area relative to the area of the line forming the characters than the specific characters used in the win number display 20SHK. Portion size proportions are small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Obtainment number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

The pachinko game machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH uses three-dimensional characters to display the number of wins. Here, the three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear to pop out to the front. The line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS21 expressing the character and an area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are also characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-5 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the jackpot background image, the jackpot background image becomes visible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-3D characters and 3D characters)
FIG. 11-5(B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions.

Comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-3D character and the size of the line area forming the 3D character. The size of the area 20SHS21 expressing characters is the same size. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is an area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, since the area of lines forming the character includes the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character, the inner outline of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character and the area located on the inner side thereof The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character becomes the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the 3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is displayed in the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character, which is located on the inner circumference side of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character, rather than the non-3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the character is small.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-6(A) is a diagram showing a modification example 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used in the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

In the example shown in Figure 11-6(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI4 is displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the jackpot background image, the jackpot background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison of non-3D characters and 3D characters in modification example 1)
FIG. 11-6(B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in Modification 1.

Also in Modified Example 1, when comparing the non-3D characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used to display the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-3D characters and the size of the three-dimensional characters forming the 3D characters. The size of the line area 20SH31 representing the character is the same as that of the line area 20SH31. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is an area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, the area of lines forming the character includes an area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character, so the inner outline of the area 20SH31 that expresses the character and the characters on the inner side The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the area 20SHI4 becomes the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the 3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is displayed in the area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character, which is located on the inner circumference side of the area 20SH31 that expresses the character, than the non-3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size of , and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the character is small.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-7(A) is a diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

In modification example 2, as shown in Figure 11-7 (A), the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line area forming the character. The display is displayed in any one of display modes A to G, which have different combinations.

The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode A is colored with a gradation of three colors: "red" in the upper region 20SHSU, "orange" in the center region 20SHSC, and "yellow" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode B is colored with a gradation of three colors: "orange" in the upper region 20SHSU, "yellow" in the center region 20SHSC, and "green" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode C is colored with a gradation of three colors: "yellow" in the upper region 20SHSU, "green" in the center region 20SHSC, and "light blue" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode D is colored with a gradation of three colors: "green" in the upper region 20SHSU, "light blue" in the center region 20SHSC, and "blue" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode E is colored with a gradation of three colors: "light blue" in the upper region 20SHSU, "blue" in the center region 20SHSC, and "purple" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode F is colored with a gradation of three colors: "blue" in the upper region 20SHSU, "purple" in the center region 20SHSC, and "red" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode G is colored with a gradation of three colors: "purple" in the upper region 20SHSU, "red" in the center region 20SHSC, and "yellow" in the lower region 20SHSD.

The image display device 5 changes the format of the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the following order: display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display format G → display format A → ... are changed over time and displayed.

FIG. 11-7(B) is a diagram showing an example of a color change accompanying the operation of displaying the number of acquisitions in Modification 2.

In modification example 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(B), there are cases when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moved (frame-in). The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes is different depending on when the player is out of frame.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7(B), the acquisition number notification display is displayed while moving (frame-in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over a period of 0.35 seconds. , changes sequentially from display mode A to display mode D. Thereafter, the acquisition number display changes in order from display mode D to display mode G while being stopped and displayed for one second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Thereafter, while the acquisition number notification display moves (frames out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over a period of 0.35 seconds, the display mode changes from display mode G to display mode C. Change.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the acquired number on the front side of the background image during the jackpot to notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As a notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "1000 over", and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed. When the number reaches "2000 pieces", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over". The acquired number display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. The characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions. The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and notifying the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. In addition, the background image of the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used to display the number of wins. The specific character used for displaying the acquisition number notification has a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the area of the line forming the character than the specific character used for displaying the acquisition number.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display, but the acquired number display is displayed in small sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and the acquired number display is If the background image during the jackpot is visible from a specific area, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image during the jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

Furthermore, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are three-dimensional characters. The line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area representing the character and an area representing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the acquisition number notification display.

Furthermore, as described above, the background image of the jackpot background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific characters used for displaying the winning number notification.

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period to congratulate the player when he or she plays the game, and is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character is small, it is possible not only to suppress the risk of misrecognizing the character even if the background image during the jackpot can be seen from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character, but also to suppress the risk of misrecognizing the character. The production effect can be enhanced by making the background image visible during the jackpot from 20SHI3.

Further, as described above, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display in the first modification are such that the jackpot background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time to congratulate the player when the player has played, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, with a specific area corresponding to the size of the line area forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of is small, it is possible not only to suppress the sense of discomfort even if the jackpot background image cannot be seen from a specific area of a specific character, but also to make the jackpot background image invisible from a specific area of a specific character. By doing this, you can prevent characters from being misidentified.

Further, as described above, in the characters used for displaying the acquisition number notification in the second modification, the line area forming the characters is displayed in a three-color gradation. The image display device 5 then changes the format of the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions to display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display format G → display format. The display changes over time in the order of A→.... Then, when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and when the number of acquisitions notification display is moving (frame in/frame out), the number of acquisitions notification display changes. The speed at which the display mode changes is different.

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes depending on the moving speed of the acquired number notification display, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(Explanation regarding the third form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11. In the pachinko game machine 1 related to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH, the ending background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters used for displaying the result.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the third form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used to display results)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used in the result display in the third form of the feature section 20SH.

When the pachinko game machine 1 finishes the round game of the final round, it executes an ending performance corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background video. Furthermore, while displaying the ending background video, the image display device 5 displays a result display that informs the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state.

The result display uses numbers for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers for recognizing that it is a result display. The numbers used for displaying the results are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used for displaying results, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the feature section 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-8, a specific area of a specific character used for displaying a result is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in Figure 11-8, the specific areas 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the result display are transparent. It is displayed in the display mode.

Among the characters used in the result display, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers to recognize that it is a result display are also shown in Figure 11. The specific area is displayed in a transparent manner, as shown by the Arabic numeral 8.

(Various performances in jackpot game state)
FIG. 11-9 is a diagram showing an example of performance periods of various performances in the jackpot game state. FIG. 11-10 is a diagram showing an example of performance operation of various performances in a jackpot game state.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing an in-retention consecutive game notice indicating that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the stored reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the jackpot gaming state. be. For example, in the case of a jackpot game state with all 10 rounds, the production control CPU 120 will control the performance control CPU 120 after 9 rounds of round games are completed and the final round game as shown in FIGS. At timing T1 when a round game of 10 rounds is started, a pending consecutive game notice is started.

When the on-hold consecutive game notice is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the round game is in progress in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B). During the jackpot, an effect image of the pending consecutive winnings preview will be displayed on the front side of the background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the effect image 20SHE of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the pending multiplayer preview.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the "flame" line of the effect image overlaps the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK. Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect video cannot be viewed from the specific area. Therefore, in a specific area, the "flame" line in the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (B) to (C), at timing T2 when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 End the series preview and start the ending performance. When the ending effect is started, the ending background image is started to be displayed at a predetermined brightness in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in the first display area 20SH51, an ending background image in which a snowstorm of cherry blossoms dances from the back of the screen is displayed. Further, in front of the ending background image, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed in response to the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 ends the on-hold series preview before the ending background video starts to be displayed at timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background video is displayed, the effect video 20SHE of the on-hold consecutive show preview is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the on-hold consecutive show preview is displayed when the ending background video is not displayed.

The ending background image only needs to be an image displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and as shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the ending background image may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. There may be cases where In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the cherry blossom snowstorm displayed as the ending background image is dancing across the screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (D) to (E), at timing T3 to start displaying the result, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to a value lower than a predetermined brightness. It lowers the brightness to a certain dark level, pauses the progress of the ending background image, and displays it as a still image. Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(E), the fluttering cherry blossoms have come to rest, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed with the specific area 20SHI5 being transparent. Therefore, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is visible from the specific area 20SHI5.

Note that the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A), (B), and (E). Further, the result display 20SHRE only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and as shown in FIG. 11-10(E), it is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. It may happen.

(Suggestion of setting based on ending background video)
FIG. 11-11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation mode of setting suggestion presentation using an ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball payout rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" In the order of , the larger the value, the higher the ball payout rate. In other words, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is the least advantageous for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value and to display the above-mentioned ending background image as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which cherry blossoms are falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of snowflakes fall from cherry blossom trees in full bloom on the left and right sides, as shown in FIG. 11-11(B).

Note that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the setting value is low, the ending background image shown in Figure 11-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is high, the ending background image may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate. In addition, the ending background image shown in FIG. 11-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

Furthermore, the ending background video may have different performance modes depending on whether the setting value is "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, or when it is not the setting value "6". Further, the ending background video may have different effects depending on whether the setting value is an odd number or the setting value is an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned on-hold consecutive game notice is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for foretelling the jackpot reliability, but the setting suggestion performance based on the pending consecutive game notice is not executed.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Furthermore, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the jackpot game state in accordance with the stored hold information in the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a preview of a pending consecutive play that suggests that the same will be played. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. Furthermore, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 displays a result display on the front side of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 that notifies the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. Further, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK make it impossible to view the background image during the jackpot and the effect image 20SHRE of the on-hold consecutive winnings preview from the specific area. On the other hand, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is visible from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background video and the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive winnings notice, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the ending background video. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, Because it may overlap with the effect video 20SHE of the preview, if the background video during the jackpot or the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive preview is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will appear to be a different character from the original character. However, by making the background image during a jackpot and the effect image 20SHE of a preview of consecutive games on hold invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and does not overlap with the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive show preview, so the ending background video can be viewed from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it becomes possible to show even a little of the ending background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner that suggests the set value. The effect video 20SHRE of the on-hold consecutive game preview is one of a plurality of types of preview presentations for foretelling the jackpot reliability, but the setting suggestion performance based on the pending consecutive game preview is not executed.

According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect using the ending background video will be executed, the significance of the ending background video being visible from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is It increases.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness. Then, at timing T3 when starting to display the result display 20SHRE, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness that is darker than a predetermined brightness, and displays it at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness. Display result display 20SHRE.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result display 20SHRE can be improved.

(Explanation regarding the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12 to 11-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH, there is a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the probability variable state, and when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined number is notified. It is possible to display the remaining number of times notification display. The characters used for the remaining number of times display and the remaining number of times notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the remaining number of times are such that the background image during the ST is not visible from the specific area. The specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display are such that the background image during the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic section 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-12 are diagrams illustrating background technology related to the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

Basically, if you compare states that are advantageous to the player, such as variable probability states, time-saving states, jackpot gaming states, etc., and normal states, pachinko gaming machines are more likely to play games in normal states than during periods in which players play games in advantageous states. It is designed to last for a longer period of time.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, when the upper limit number of reservation information is stored, when the upper limit number of reservation information is not stored. It is easier to execute a shortening variation in which the variable display time is shorter than the above. In the probability variable state with time saving control, the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, so winnings are more likely to occur than in the normal state, so the shortening variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to advance the game. Therefore, the period in which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period in which the game is played in the variable probability state with time saving control.

In probability variable control, after the end of the jackpot game state, either of the following conditions is met first: when the special figure game is executed for a predetermined number of STs, or when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot" It ends when. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when variable probability control is being performed, the variable probability control will end if the predetermined number of ST times of special symbol games are played. . Note that the predetermined number of times ST is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game is shortened compared to when the time saving control is not performed. Time-saving control is performed when either of the following conditions is met first: the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game state ends, or the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot". It ends when. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not result in a "jackpot" when the time saving control is being performed, the time saving control will end if the predetermined number of time saving games have been played. . Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

Note that the set value for the number of ST times and the set value for the number of time saving times may be different values.

When the pachinko game machine is controlled in the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the pachinko game machine may display a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), in response to the fact that the remaining number of ST times is 30, the remaining number of times "30 times remaining" is displayed.

For displaying the remaining number of times, numbers are used to display the remaining number of ST times, and characters other than numbers are used to make it clear that the number of times remaining is displayed. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The remaining number of times display shown in Figure 11-12 (A) has the characters "remaining" and "times" to remind you that it is a remaining number of times display, and "30" to display the remaining number of ST times. The numbers and are used.

Among the characters used to display the remaining number of times, there are specific characters that form specific areas.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine is controlled to be in a variable probability state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the ST background image is displayed in a manner that the screen appears to be cracked. The background image during ST is an image that is displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the probability change state. The ST background image contains many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number of times display is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not obstruct the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device. When the ST background image changes over time, the line of the ST background image may overlap with the back of the remaining count display. When a specific character is displayed on the remaining count display, ST When the lines of the middle image overlap, the lines of the ST middle background image are assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character.

FIG. 11-12(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-12(A). In the examples shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the line of the ST background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of remaining times, and the ST background image line is assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the characters indicating the remaining number of times are mistakenly recognized as characters different from the original characters, the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the ST background image so that the line of the ST background image does not overlap with a specific area of a specific character.

The fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH was made in view of this background, and the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH will be described below.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-13 are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times is , is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-13, the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS6 used to display the remaining number of times is "black", while the specific characters "0", "4", "6", " The specific areas 20SHI6 of "8" and "9" are displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI6.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the maple, but the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the maple, but the display mode of the character is Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed.

For example, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture with a high contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Among the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the remaining number of ST times and specific characters other than numbers to recognize that the remaining number of times are displayed are also shown in the diagram. As with the Arabic numerals 11-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display manner, which is different from the display manner of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-14 are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times notification in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display that notifies the predetermined number of times.

The remaining number of times notification display includes a number to display the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times notification display. and are used. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

The remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a plurality of types with different transmittances, as shown in FIGS. 11-14. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 11-14(A) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is not transparent, and the background of the characters cannot be seen from the line area. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 11-14(B) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is transparent, and the background of the characters can be seen from the line area.

Further, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS71 representing the character and an area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional character. In a display mode where the background of the characters is transparent, the area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed transparently, and in a display mode where the background of the characters is not visible, it is displayed as the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional characters. The area is displayed as an area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are also characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-14, the specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times are shown. 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image becomes visible from the specific area 20SHI7.

As shown in FIGS. 11-14, the specific area 20SHI7 for the remaining number of times notification display is different depending on whether the remaining number of times notification is displayed in a non-transparent manner or in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the character, the area that represents the character The area surrounded by the inner outline of 20SHS71 and the outline of area 20SHS72A representing the depth of characters located on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-14(B), the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed transparently, so the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters is displayed. The area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B becomes the specific area 20SHI7.

(How the remaining count display appears in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining number of times display appears in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 11-15(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-15(A).

In the examples shown in Figures 11-15 (A) and (B), the line of the background image in ST overlaps with the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the remaining count display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the ST background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI6, it is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the ST middle background image, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the image display device 5 also displays a number of wins display 20SHK, a right-handed hit display 20SHM, and a probability variation display 20SHRU for making it clear that the probability variation state is being controlled. There is. The acquired number display 20SHK, the right hit display 20SHM, and the probability change display 20SHRU are also displayed in a small size in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 that does not obstruct the visibility of the decorative symbols, similarly to the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the variable probability display 20SHRU are the same type of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the same type of characters are used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may also include characters of a different type than those shown in the text. In this embodiment, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH use "numbers", "hiragana", and "kanji" as shown in FIG. 11-17. On the other hand, the probability variation display 20SHRU uses "alphabet" which is a different type of character from the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. In addition, the acquired number display 20SHK includes "numbers", which are the same type of characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, and the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. A different type of character, ``katakana,'' is used. In addition, the right-hand display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji", which are the same types of characters used for the remaining count display 20SHST and the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH, and the remaining count display 20SHST and remaining count notification display 20SHSTH. "Symbols", which are characters of a different type from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-hand hit display 20SHM, and the variable probability display 20SHRU, there are characters that correspond to specific characters regardless of the type of the character. Similar to the specific area 20SHI6 of the remaining count display 20SHST, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability change display 20SHRU is also in a non-transparent display mode, and the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters are Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during ST is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of production operation of remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIGS. 11-17 are diagrams illustrating an example of the performance operation of displaying the remaining number of times and displaying the remaining number of times notification in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays a remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 11-17 (A) and (B), each time the variable display is executed, the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of ST times in the remaining number display 20 SHST. and display it.

As shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (A) and (B), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times is started. The remaining number notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times starts to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. For example, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the remaining number of times when a variable display is started in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, or 10 times. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH starts to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in FIGS. 11-17(B) to (D), the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-17, when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display in which the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed. It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (C), when the first period has elapsed after starting the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the production control CPU 120 The display mode of the number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (E), when the second period has passed after changing the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the performance control CPU 120, The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of performing variable display based on a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a possibility that the remaining number of ST times may be misunderstood.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to be able to end the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in one variable display, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are provided. The total period including the second period displayed in the transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variation pattern the variable display is executed based on, In the first variable display, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be ended.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the above-mentioned "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed on the front side of the identification information in at least the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the invisible remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, so that the display result of the variable display can be recognized, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the variable display time is the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time. The variable display is set to end before the display result is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variation pattern the variable display is executed based on, The display result of variable display can be suitably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17(D), the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed to a transparent display mode. Since the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changing, the identification information in the background of the characters can be visually recognized from the area of the line forming the characters of the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH.

In addition, in this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent manner when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed. However, if a pseudo continuous effect is executed in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST is a predetermined number of times, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the remaining number of times is displayed. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent manner.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a variable probability state with time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than the normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state on the front side of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 also provides a remaining number of times notification that notifies a predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the background image during ST in at least the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHSTH, the remaining number display 20SHSTH notifies "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST reaches 60, and the remaining number display 20SHSTH notifies "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST reaches 50. 50" remaining number notification display 20SHSTH can be displayed. The remaining count display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH ends its display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it started displaying. The characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining count display 20SHST are such that the ST background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are visible from the specific area 20SHI7 in the ST background image.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background video during the ST. For example, when a player checks the remaining ST count in a variable probability state, he or she checks the remaining count display 20SHST, but the remaining count display 20SHST is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52. If the ST background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but the ST background image cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, specific characters can be recognized accurately. Further, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not always displayed like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, but is a predetermined number to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST is a predetermined number. Since it is displayed only for a limited time and is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image visible during ST from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific character, the first At the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show even a small amount of the background image during the ST.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side is visible through the line portion forming the characters. be.

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be made visible while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, it is possible to avoid unnecessary stress on the player.

Further, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The image display device 5 can display a remaining number notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of decorative symbols can be made visible when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to avoid giving unnecessary stress to the player. .

Furthermore, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays it in a display mode that allows the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH to be transmitted.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the acquired number display 20SHK from decreasing due to the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of a stop button. It is possible.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ), a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51.) and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and the second display In the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display an award amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display a display of the award amount of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52). (e.g., it is possible to display an acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side), and at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, the amount of game value awarded is a predetermined amount. As notification displays to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and a first notification display to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state on the front side of the background image during the jackpot. As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that informs you that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display will be displayed as "1000 over". (e.g., when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "over 2000"), the award amount display is The notification display is updated every time a gaming value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot gaming state), and the notification display is The display is ended when a specific period of time has passed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is to end the display when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the display, etc.), and the notification is The characters used for the display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK). The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK and the number of acquisitions The characters used in the notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used in the display of the amount of application include the specific characters that form the background image from the specific area. is not visible (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during the jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the notification display are not visible in the specific area. It is characterized in that the background image is visible from the background image (for example, the specific characters used in the winning number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image during the jackpot is visible from a specific area).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the provision amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area. , if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is meant to congratulate the player when the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time, and large-sized characters are displayed in a wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character, the first display area is It becomes possible to show even a small amount of the background image at a prominent display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6, 8, 9, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the amount of application and the notification display using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means displays the notification display while displaying the award amount display (for example, the image display device 5 When the display 20SHK is displayed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed.

According to such a configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, the amount of gaming value awarded in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped by the amount displayed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means is capable of displaying the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image The display device 5 may be able to display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the display means is capable of displaying a specific display regarding the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area; For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, a right hit display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot background image, etc.) , the characters used for the specific display include the same type of characters as the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display, and the characters of a different type from the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display. , all types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, used for jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, right hit display 20SHM). The characters include the same type of characters as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. 2 types of characters also include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the specific display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM mean that the background image during the jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area).

According to such a configuration, the specific characters can be accurately recognized even in the specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and has a display means. (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area, and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, (e.g., a second display area 20SH52 narrower than , the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and in the second display area, the background image is displayed. (For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display a display of the amount of the gaming value that has been awarded on the front side of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. (e.g., the number of prize balls acquired), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a predetermined amount; The displays include a first notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value given has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value given has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the jackpot, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban"). When the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", it is possible to display a win number notification display that says "over 1000", and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", (e.g., when the number of award balls awarded reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over"), the award amount display is such that when the number of prize balls awarded reaches "2000", the award amount display is such that the gaming value is increased in the advantageous state. It is updated every time a game ball is awarded (for example, the number of acquisitions display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is updated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. (For example, the display notifying the number of acquisitions ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the display.) The characters are larger in size than the characters used for display (for example, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions), and the amount displayed and The characters used in the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include lines forming the characters). (e.g., a specific area surrounded by The specific characters used for the notification display are more similar to the lines forming the characters than the specific characters used for the award amount display. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area is small (for example, the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions) than the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. (e.g., the ratio of the size of the specific area to the area is small).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the provision amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area. , if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used for the notification display are three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters), and the three-dimensional characters are The line area to be formed may include an area for expressing characters and an area for expressing the depth of the characters.

According to such a configuration, the presentation effect of the notification display can be enhanced.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display). The background image during the jackpot may be visible from the specific area 20SHI3, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is displayed when the award amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period to bless people, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the area of the lines forming the characters. Since the background image is small, it is possible to not only reduce the risk of misrecognizing the characters even if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, but also increase the production effect by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character. can be increased.

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, in the acquisition number notification display in Modification 1). The specific characters used may be such that the background image is not visible during the jackpot from the specific area 20SHI4, etc.).

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time to congratulate the player when the player has played, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, with a specific area corresponding to the size of the line area forming the characters. Since the proportion of the size of the character is small, it is possible to not only suppress the sense of discomfort even if the background image is not visible from a specific area of a specific character, but also to suppress the sense of discomfort even if the background image is not visible from a specific area of a specific character. This can prevent misunderstandings.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the display means is capable of changing the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 displays the number of acquired (such as that the notification display 20SHKH can be displayed by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51), and when the specific period has elapsed since the notification display mode changed to the specific mode, the notification display mode is changed. Change the mode to a mode different from the specific mode (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is brought into frame to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is made to frame out) etc.), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used for the notification display are displayed in a plurality of colors in the line area forming the characters (for example, a modification example regarding the second form of the characteristic part 20SH). The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in 2 are displayed in a gradation of three colors in the line area forming the characters, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the character format used for displaying the acquisition number notification in the following manner: display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display mode G→display mode A→..., etc.), when the notification display is displayed in the specific mode, and when it is displayed in a different mode from the specific mode. The speed at which the combination of the plurality of colors changes differs depending on when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 (for example, when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and when the number of acquisitions notification display is The display mode of the acquisition number notification display may change at a different speed depending on when the player is moving (frame-in/frame-out), etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes depending on the moving speed of the notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state where the game can proceed faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device The display area of No. 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is , in the first display area and the second display area, a background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). , a background image during ST, etc.), and in the second display area, a variation number display regarding the number of variations in the special state can be displayed on the front side of the background image (for example, an image display device 5 is that in the second display area 20SH52, a remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state can be displayed on the front side of the ST background image, etc.), at least in the first display area, A frequency notification display is displayed on the front side of the background image to notify the number of fluctuations when the value of the fluctuation frequency display reaches a predetermined value, and the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the fluctuation frequency display reaches a first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display that notifies the number of changes when the value of the number of changes display reaches a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the first number of times notification display). 1 display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during ST, a remaining number display 20SHST is displayed as a remaining number display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH notifies you of ``60'' when the number of remaining times shown by the remaining number of times reaches 60, and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH notifies you of ``50'' when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times shown by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50 times. ), and the variable number display is updated every time the variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed). , the number of times notification display ends displaying when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends displaying when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it started displaying). The characters used for the number of times notification display are larger than the characters used for the number of fluctuations display (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are the same as those used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST). The characters used for the variable number display and the number notification display include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed ( For example, the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the variable number display include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc. The background video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are such that the background video is not visible during ST from the specific area 20SHI6), and the specific characters used for the number of times notification display are is characterized in that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH indicate that the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI7). do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the variation count display and the count notification display including the specific character in relation to the background image. For example, when checking the number of fluctuations in a special state, the player checks the fluctuation number display, but the fluctuation number display is displayed in small sized characters in a narrow second display area, and the number of fluctuations is displayed in small sized characters in a narrow second display area. If the background image is visible, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from a specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be recognized accurately. be able to. In addition, the number notification display is not displayed all the time like the fluctuating number of times display, but is displayed only during a specific period to alert players that the remaining number of times indicated by the fluctuating number of times display will reach a predetermined number of times. Since the characters are displayed in large size in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, in the conspicuous display position of the first display area, It becomes possible to show even a small amount of the background image.

(13) In the gaming machine according to (12) above, the display means is capable of displaying the characters used for the number of times notification display in a transparent manner in which an image on the back side can be seen through the area of the line forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side is visible through the line part forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be made visible when the number of times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine according to (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which identification information is displayed variably (for example, the first display area 20SH51 includes "left", "middle", In the variable display area, the display means can display the number of times notification display on the front side of the identification information (for example, , the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the identification information can be made visible while the number of times notification display is being displayed, it is possible to avoid giving unnecessary stress to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 If the display result is derived and displayed, display it in a display mode that allows the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH to be transmitted, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while displaying the number of times notification display, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of the gaming value that has been provided (for example, the image display device 5 is , an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls awarded), and displaying the number of times notification display in a display area different from the display area where the award amount display is displayed (for example, an image display The device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the application amount display from decreasing due to the display of the number of times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ), a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51.) and a second display area 20SH52 which is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is configured to display information indicating that the advantageous state is progressing in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 can display a first background image corresponding to the progress of a round game in a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and second display area 20SH52. (for example, the image display device 5 can display a second background image corresponding to the end of the advantageous state at least in the first display area). In the first display area 20SH51, it is possible to display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc.), when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the In front of the first background image, it is possible to display a specific suggestion image that gives a suggestion regarding the progress of the game (for example, the image display device 5 can display a specific suggestion image in the second display area 20SH52 when the ending background image is not displayed). , on the front side of the jackpot background image, it is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a pending consecutive game preview indicating that the jackpot game state will be controlled in accordance with the stored pending information, etc.), In the second display area, in the front side of the first background image, it is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the awarded gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 can display, in the second display area 20SH52, (e.g., it is possible to display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the background image during a jackpot), when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, On the front side of the second background image, it is possible to display a result notification display that informs the amount of gaming value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display a result notification display when the ending background image is displayed). (e.g., it is possible to display a result display 20SHRE that informs the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state on the front side of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 when The characters used for the display are larger in size than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). etc.), and the characters used in the award amount display and the result notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE). The characters used include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed, etc.), and the specific character used for the display of the amount of application is determined from the specific area to the first background image and the previous period. The specific suggestion video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, the background video during the jackpot and the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive winnings preview are not visible from the specific area, etc.) The specific characters used in the result notification display are such that the second background video is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background video is visible from the specific area 20SHI5). (e.g.).

According to such a configuration, the provision amount display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the first background video and the specific suggestion video, and the result notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the second background video. can be suitably displayed in relation to For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small sized characters in the narrow second display area, and the amount displayed is Since it may overlap with the suggested image, if the first background image or specific suggested image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character. By making the jackpot background image and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion video, so by making the second background video visible from the specific area of the specific characters, It becomes possible to show at least a little of the second background image in the prominent display position of the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of (17) above, a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability (such as being able to set any one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6"), and the display means indicates the setting value set by the setting means. The second background video can be displayed in a manner that suggests the set value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner that suggests the set value), and the specific suggestion video is This is an aspect of a plurality of types of suggestion videos that make suggestions regarding the advantageous state, and do not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive winnings preview predicts the reliability of the jackpot). Although this is one of multiple types of preview effects, setting suggestion effects based on pending continuous play notices should not be executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting value is suggested by the second background image, so the significance of the second background image being visible from the specific area of the specific character used for displaying the result notification. increases.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background image at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image at a predetermined brightness). (such as starting display of an image), at the timing of starting display of the result notification display, the second background image is temporarily stopped and displayed at a specific brightness that is darker than the predetermined brightness, and Display the result notification display at a brightness that is brighter than the brightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses the ending background video at a specific brightness that is lower than a predetermined brightness at timing T3 when starting to display the result display 20SHRE) and displaying the result display 20SHRE at a brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result notification display can be improved.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 19SH will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 19SH displays the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the jackpot slot in the jackpot game state, and the number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state. It is possible to display the expected number of balls to be acquired regarding the total number of balls awarded. Furthermore, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the expected number of wins invisible or difficult when an over-win occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the planned acquisition number display when the display of the planned acquisition number becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over winning performance before the display of the expected number of wins becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 19SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Production operation when a winning occurs during a round game)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation when a winning occurs during a round game. FIG. 12-2 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 12-1(A), the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment displays the number of acquisitions as 20SHK when the jackpot game state is controlled, and the game ball is placed in the jackpot slot in the jackpot game state. An acquired number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded by entering the game, and an expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 regarding the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 12-1 (A), the acquisition number display 20SHK is separated by the middle bracket "/", such as "135/1500", and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator is "135/1500". It is displayed in the format of a fraction, with the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 having "1500" in the denominator. That is, the acquired number display 20SHK shown in FIG. 12-1(A) indicates that the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the jackpot slot in the jackpot game state is 135 balls, and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 135 balls. This shows that the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded is 1,500.

Also in this embodiment, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, and the second display area 20SH52 includes a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, and a round number display 20SHR. , the right-handed indication 20SHM is also displayed. Further, on the image display device 5, a jackpot background image in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed in correspondence with the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state. Note that the background image during the jackpot is displayed on a display layer arranged on the back side of the display layer where the winning number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-2.

When a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the jackpot in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 12-1 (B) to (F). Update the value of 20SHK.

When a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the big prize opening in the jackpot game state, first, as shown in FIG. The display of the effect display is started in the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7. Here, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 when viewed from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right end of the display area of the image display device 5. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display has started at the lower right end of the display area is displayed. moving towards the top of the area. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer placed in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible, but as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

In the example shown in Figure 12-1 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, so the acquisition number display 20SHK is no longer visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it is impossible to do so. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to view.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-1 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-2 (D) to (E). As a result, when the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-1 (D) to (E) and 12-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-1(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is now visible as the effect display 20SHEF has finished displaying, and it is possible to confirm that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated. can.

According to such a production mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby attracting attention to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. When this happens, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 that has been noticed has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over-winning occurs)
FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an over-win occurs. FIG. 12-4 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole in one round game, the big winning hole is closed. A so-called over-win may occur in which the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole following the 10th game ball. When an over-win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the number of wins display 20SHK according to the performance mode as shown in FIG. 12-3.

When an over-win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 first forms a big winning opening, as shown in FIGS. The effect display starts to be displayed in the display area near the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right end of the display area of the image display device 5. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which has started displaying at the lower right end of the display area, is displayed. moving towards the top of the area. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the performance control CPU 120 controls the effect display 20SHEF to display the number of acquisitions 20SHK before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK. To start an over-winning presentation that notifies the occurrence of an over-winning before it becomes invisible or difficult to see. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), an over winning effect video in which the character CHCB appears is displayed on the image display device 5.

Note that the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using another performance device as an over winning performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs an over-win sound different from the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as an over-win effect. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the over winning sound of "picone picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emission mode different from the sound at the time of normal winning as an over winning performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer placed in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible, but as shown in FIG. 12-4(D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, so the acquisition number display 20SHK is no longer visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it is impossible to do so. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-4 (D) to (E). As a result, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in Figures 12-3 (D) to (E) and Figures 12-4 (D) to (E), the value of acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquisition number display is The value of 20SHK2 has been updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-3(F). In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is now visible as the effect display 20SHEF has finished displaying, and the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have been updated. You can confirm that.

According to such a production mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby attracting attention to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. By updating the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number is When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to suitably make the user recognize that the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2, which have been attracting attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-win occurs, not only the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 but also the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, so the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state is It is possible to suitably make the player recognize that the number of prize balls has increased by the number of prize balls received.

After ending the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (G). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (G), the display of the over winning effect video that was being displayed on the image display device 5 as an over winning effect has ended, and a jackpot background image in which the character 20SHCA appears is now displayed.

(Suggestion of setting based on over-winning performance)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball payout rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" In the order of , the larger the value, the higher the ball payout rate. In other words, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is the least advantageous for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to change the setting value, and to be able to execute the above-mentioned over winning effect as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the performance control CPU 120 displays an over winning performance video in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The over winning sound of "Picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is set to high, the performance control CPU 120 displays an over winning performance video in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The over-winning sound "Peep-Paw" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that the setting suggestion effect based on the over-winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, an over winning effect as shown in Figure 12-5 (B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the set value is set high In addition, an over-winning effect as shown in FIG. 12-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

Further, the over winning performance may have different performance modes depending on whether the set value is "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, or when the set value is not "6". Further, the over winning effect may have different effects depending on whether the set value is an odd number or the set value is an even number.

(If there is a round in which the specified number of prizes was not won and a round in which over-wins occurred)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of the production operation in the characteristic section 19SH when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred.

As mentioned above, the open state of the jackpot game state continues until the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot hole reaches a predetermined number, whichever is earlier. .

In the example shown in Figures 12-6 (A) and (B), in one round of the round game, there were 9 winnings, but before the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have elapsed, one round of the round game has ended, and a second round of the round game has started. In this example, as shown in Figure 12-6 (B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed as "135/1500". ing. In this example, the explanation will be made assuming that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which a 10-round round game is executed is 1500 balls.

Then, in the 2nd round of the round game, the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10 and the 2nd round of the round game ended, and in the 3rd round of the round game, there were also 10 prizes. shall be. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third round games. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in FIG. 12-6(C).

It is assumed that an over winning occurs in the three rounds of the round game. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-6(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6(E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquisition number display The value of 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

It is assumed that the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches 10 in each round game of 4th round to 10th round, and the round game of each round ends. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the fourth round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (G).

When all 10 rounds of round games are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in Figure 12-6 (H), and the result display 20SH shows that the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 1500 balls. This will be announced.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500 balls, but since over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games, the final The value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, since only nine prizes were won in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is not "1515" but "1500".

According to this embodiment, if there is a round in which the predetermined number of winnings is not won and a round in which over-winning occurs, the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK1 is smaller than the value of the expected number of winnings display 20SHK2. By checking the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to see that there was a round in which the predetermined number of prizes was not won, and that there was a round in which over-winning occurred.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing another example of the production operation in the characteristic section 19SH when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred.

In the example shown in Figures 12-7 (A) and (B), in one round of the round game, there were 9 winnings, but before the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have elapsed, one round of the round game has ended, and a second round of the round game has started. In this example, as shown in Figure 12-7 (B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed as "135/1500". ing. In this example, the explanation will be made assuming that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which a 10-round round game is executed is 1500 balls.

Then, in the 2nd round of the round game, the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10 and the 2nd round of the round game ended, and in the 3rd round of the round game, there were also 10 prizes. shall be. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third round games. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 12-7(C).

It is assumed that an over winning occurs in the three rounds of the round game. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-7(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquisition number display 20SHEF becomes invisible or difficult. The value of 20SHK1 is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 has not been updated and remains at "1500".

It is assumed that the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches 10 in each round game of 4th round to 10th round, and the round game of each round ends. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the fourth round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G).

When all 10 rounds of round games are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in Figure 12-7 (H), and the result display 20SH shows that the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 1500 balls. This will be announced.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500, but over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games. However, the value of the final expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since only nine prizes were won in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes are not won and a round in which over-wins occur, a sense of incongruity is prevented from occurring due to the values of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2. be able to.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the feature section 19SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to be in the jackpot game state. . Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a performance control CPU 120 that can execute an over winning performance when an over winning performance occurs in one round game. Then, the image display device 5 displays an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state. A scheduled number display 20SHK2 can be displayed. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see when an over-win occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over winning performance before the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, the user feels more uncomfortable than when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is made visible. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using the image display device 5 and a performance using the speakers 8L and 8R as an over winning performance.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the over winning performance.

Further, as described above, when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect display. 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the fact that a game ball has entered the special variable prize winning device 7 can be expressed by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the interest can be improved. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 but also the acquisition number display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult to see, so that it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

In addition, as described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 naturally come into view. Therefore, due to the attention paid to the effect display 20SHEF, attention can also be drawn to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 in the state before the value is updated.

Furthermore, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it possible to recognize in advance that an over-win has occurred by executing the over-win presentation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the over-winning presentation.

Further, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance after the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends.

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 becomes visible while the over-winning presentation continues, so that the feeling of discomfort caused by the update of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 becomes visible. can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modified example regarding characteristic part 19SH)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding error detection codes and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for playing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage, the CPU 103 will be able to resume the game played before the power outage after the power outage is restored by executing the power supply outage process. Can be continued.

On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 does not back up various data for proceeding with the performance. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 cannot continue the performance based on the information on the game before the power outage after the power outage is restored.

For example, if power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like during a round game, the effect control CPU 120 will not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power is restored. In that case, the production control CPU 120 may display the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 in the round game after the power outage has been restored, or display specific information such as "????/????" The acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquired number display 20SHK2 are displayed without displaying the values. In addition, even if a winning occurs in the round game after the power outage is restored, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 is not executing the performance corresponding to the round game. . On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 can identify that an over-win has occurred in one round of the round game after the power outage has been restored, the performance control CPU 120 will not execute the over-win performance using the image display device 5, but will use the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to perform an over winning effect using the attacker lamp 9c. Note that the production control CPU 120 can specify that an over-win has occurred, for example, by using a production control command that notifies the player of an over-win.

According to such a configuration, in a situation where the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power outage is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed, so that a feeling of discomfort does not occur. On the other hand, if an over-win occurs, it can be notified to that effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and the display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), a variable state that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. winning means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win a prize), control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, a pachinko machine); The gaming machine 1 is equipped with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when controlled to be in a jackpot game state, etc.) , a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance when more than a predetermined number of game media win the variable prize winning means in the first round game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the first round game); (e.g., comprising a performance control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-win performance when an over-win performance occurs), and the display means is configured to display a prize that is awarded when the game medium wins the variable prize-winning means. It is possible to display a first award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value and a second award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value scheduled to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 , an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and an expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 regarding the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state. displayable, etc.), and when more game media than the predetermined number win a prize in the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult (for example, The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-win occurs, and the second award amount display is made visible by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the image display device 5 updates the value of the second grant amount display (for example, when the expected acquisition amount display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the image display device 5 updates the value of the second grant amount display. , updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.), the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect (updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.) before the second grant amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display. The CPU 120 is characterized by starting the over-winning presentation before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the second application amount display is updated, a feeling of discomfort occurs when the value of the second application amount display is updated, compared to when the value of the second application amount display is updated while the second application amount display is made visible. can be suppressed.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above includes an audio output means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is configured to perform the specific effect as the specific effect. It is possible to perform a performance by the display means and a performance by the audio output means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance by the image display device 5 and a performance by the speakers 8L and 8R as an over winning performance). be feasible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the performance effect of the specific performance can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means when the game medium enters the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, the image display device 5 shows that the game ball has won a prize in the special variable winning ball device 7). At this time, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in the display area near the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to express the fact that a game ball has entered the variable prize winning means through a display effect on the display means, and it is possible to improve interest. Moreover, since not only the second application amount display but also the first application amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first award amount display and the second award amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first award amount display and the second award amount display are visible when the specific display is moving. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed when the effect display 20SHEF is moved. (for example, when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first application amount display and the second application amount display are displayed, the first application amount display and the second application amount display automatically come into view. Therefore, due to the attention to the specific display, attention can also be drawn to the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display in the state before the value is updated.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the specific performance execution means is configured to perform Start a specific performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 starts an over winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 are displayed) .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that more than a predetermined number of game media have been won by the variable winning means by executing the specific performance, so that the second award amount display is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the feeling of discomfort that occurs when

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means (for example, a pachinko game The machine 1 is capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities, and the specific performance execution means is configured to The specific effect can be executed in a manner that suggests the set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of executing the over winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value set). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the specific performance.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific performance execution means ends the specific performance after the display of the specific display ends (for example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the effect display 20SHEF to After the competition ends, the over-winning performance must be ended, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the second grant amount display becomes visible while the specific performance continues, so that the feeling of discomfort caused by the second grant amount display being updated can be avoided. , can be suppressed more effectively.

(Other examples of transition to time saving state)
In addition, in each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modifications, the transition to the time-saving state is exemplified in such a manner that the transition to the time-saving state always occurs via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 operates. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state may be entered without operating the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for small winning symbols, a random number for jackpot lottery determination, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same. However, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a special random number or another random number, the timing when winning a prize in the starting opening is good.

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers are used, the winning value will be the lottery result using the special random numbers, and if small-hit pattern random numbers are used for time-saving symbols, the winning value will be the specific small-winning symbol. When a random number is used as a winning value and a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used for a time-saving symbol lottery, the random number for a fall lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. A time-saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as the winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure and when the small winning symbol uses the time-saving symbols together, the variable display count of the time-saving state is made not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving region is passed.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be the timing after the jackpot determination. Incidentally, the time saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time saving state or the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state, no matter which random number value is used for the lottery. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time saving state, whether the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not drawn may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, there can be a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbols, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbols can be changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot, it is in a high probability low base state when the gaming hall opens, and the high probability low base state is displayed for a specified number of times. After the variable display has been executed and ended, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result (for example, a pachinko gaming machine). 1 is capable of controlling a jackpot game state, etc.), a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is a first display area, and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51, a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means includes the first display area and the second display area (For example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.) (for example, the image display device 5 can display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value awarded on the front side of the background image in the second display area). In the area 20SH52, an acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls can be displayed on the front side of the background image, etc.), and at least in the first display area, a gaming value can be displayed on the front side of the background image. The first notification display notifies that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and the second notification display that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display a second notification display to notify that the predetermined amount has been reached (for example, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the image display device 5 can display a second notification display that is given in the jackpot game state on the front side of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, which informs that the number of prize balls awarded has reached the number of "Kiriban", when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it will be displayed as "1000 over". It is possible to display an acquisition number notification display, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches ``2000 balls,'' it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying ``2000 over,'' etc.), The award amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), The notification display ends the display when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display). etc.), the characters used for the notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are the same as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). (e.g., the characters are larger in size than The characters used in the display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character, etc.), and the specific characters used in the award amount display include the specific character The background image is not visible from the area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used for the notification display are: The background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH indicate that the background image is visible from the specific area), and further, the background image is visible from the specific area. A firing means capable of firing the game medium into the game area; and firing the game medium toward the second downstream path among a first downstream path and a second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area. a guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player by using an image display on the display means, the guide display including a first guide display and a second guide display, and the guide display means , during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of a start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, The second guidance display is performed, and after completion of displaying the name of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is An example of a game machine is a game machine that continues the second guidance display even when the control ends, and continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state ends.

According to such a configuration, a display including a specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to a background image. Further, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction that prompts the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

In other words, the background image is not visible from the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters, and the characters used for the notification display are larger than the characters used to display the amount of application, and the characters in the specific area Since the background image is visible from the background image, the dispensed amount can be displayed in small fonts, making it easy to check at all times, while the notification display can display the fact that the predetermined amount has been reached in large fonts without hiding the background image. During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display emphasize an instruction to launch a game ball in a predetermined direction, and thereafter the first guide display is taken over. By instructing the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction by taking over the second guide display without over-emphasizing the instruction, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling bothered. to modestly instruct the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction, then make the player recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after making the player recognize the name, use the first guide display to firmly instruct the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. I can do it. In other words, we provide a gaming machine that makes it easy for players to grasp the amount of gaming value given when installed in a gaming parlor, makes it easy for players to recognize when a predetermined amount has been reached, and makes it easy to understand directions in which to shoot game balls in an advantageous situation. can do.

Furthermore, a gaming machine that can suitably display a display including specific characters in relation to a background image, and can suitably execute an instruction that prompts a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction. As an example of the form, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result, and which displays a game in a gaming area according to the player's operation. a firing means capable of firing the medium; and an image display for firing the game medium toward the second downstream path among a first downstream path and a second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for displaying a guide display prompting the player using the variable display, the guide display including a first guide display and a second guide display, and the guide display means displaying a display result of the variable display as the first guide display. During a predetermined period after the specific display result is reached, the second guidance display is performed before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, and After the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, the first guide display is performed and the second guide display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guide display is ended while the second guide display is displayed. In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guide display is continued. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

<Explanation regarding characteristic part 075F>
Next, a gaming machine according to the feature section 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-60.

[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in place of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 13-4), and a big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as (usually referred to as the big winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. It is equipped with a grand prize opening door, and by sliding the grand prize opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close it, the path to the regular big prize opening for game balls is opened. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 13-4), and a big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as the V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the big prize opening door slides to the back of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that enters the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024 (see Figure 13-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. . When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, in addition to a movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and an attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, there is also a movable body lamp 9d provided above the attacker. the lower left lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2; the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5; Equipped with panel left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d displays characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example) by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or in an operating state. “XXX”) is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c causes the vicinity of the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U causes the area above the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D lights up the lower left area of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The panel right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a casing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the casing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E lights up the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a casing imitating a character, similar to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (such as the left-right direction or the up-down direction), similarly to the movable lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. Equipped with

Here, FIG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to illuminate the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to cause the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and is shown in FIG. This is a board that plays the roles of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LEDs. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, the number of reserved memories, right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 13-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in Figure 13-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display part 075F021 that shows the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows the variable display of the second special figure. A display section 075F022, a special figure 1 memory display section 075F023 that shows the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section that shows the second reserved memory number that corresponds to the second special figure game. 075F024, a normal pattern memory display section 075F025 that shows the number of stored normal patterns, a normal pattern display section 075F026 that shows a variable display of the normal pattern, a right-based pattern display section 075F030 that prompts the player to play right, and a probability variable state. A probability change display section 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, a time saving display section 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of jackpots. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the lighting means such as LED in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120, and lights up the right-handed display section 075F030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-hand hit display light-off designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120, and the right-hand hit display section 075F030 is turned off. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 075F030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into. In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during that time, the right-handed display section 075F030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 has a special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 indicating the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol unit 075F051 corresponding to the second special symbol game. A special figure 2 memory display section 075F052 indicating the number of second reserved memories to be stored, a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. It includes a special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 that shows the display result, and a right-hitting display section 075F055 that urges the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means. Below, representing the variation of the stop symbols of the first special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is also referred to as a variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 is also referred to as a variable display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and prompts the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed player display unit 075F055 is turned off based on receiving a right-handed player display light-off designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 13-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 13-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L. , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (flashing) under the control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. In addition, each of these movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these together in the game. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the production control board 12, and can light up (blink) each display section under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display section can be lit (flashing) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 13-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first pending memory display area 075F005D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U is configured.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a display of the first pending memory number, and a display of the second pending memory number. are doing.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 13-5, a decorative pattern is arranged at the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a smaller size than the decorative pattern in the section. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Further, at the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13-6 to 13-8.

(Jackpot type)
FIG. 13-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in Figure 13-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R. 5R normal jackpot is a case where the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a prize (for example, a control pattern that makes it difficult to win the V jackpot (for example, a control that shortens the time for opening and closing the lid to open and close the V jackpot or a lid). This is a control to prevent the game ball from entering a specific area by repeating opening and closing of the game ball, etc.), and the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of 5 rounds of jackpot game state. Normally, in the case of a jackpot, the condition that such a low probability high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

5R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

10R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed variable jackpot have a common decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed strange jackpot have the same fanfare performance (for example, background, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that is performed when a jackpot occurs, and during the round in the jackpot game state. The performance aspects of the round performances (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and furthermore, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as long as the player sees the stopped decorative symbols, the fanfare performance, and the round performance. Here, in the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the V big prize opening opens in a predetermined round (4th R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot are also referred to as chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability variable jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round.

As for the 10R variable probability jackpot, similarly to the 5R variable probability jackpot, the V grand prize opening is opened in the predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state. However, in the case of a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, the decorative patterns that stop when the jackpot occurs, the production aspects of the fanfare production (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.), and the round production that takes place during the round of the jackpot game state. The performance mode is different from that of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability-variable jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a probability variable jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability-variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 13-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 13-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. The random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is added and updated from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type as one of 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of variation pattern) that determines the type of variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining a fluctuation pattern) that determines a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of Random 4 (for determining the initial value of Random 4).

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, out of the multiple types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot game state, which jackpot is to be determined is based on the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type. It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, a variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern type determination (Random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern determination (Random 4). is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. In addition, in the case of a loss, it is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, a normal reach variation pattern type, and a super reach variation pattern type.

For such fluctuation pattern types, when the display result is a loss, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different depending on whether the display result is in a time-saving state or not. Therefore, when the time is in the time-saving state, the rate of selection of the variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be high. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different depending on when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed as a variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the number of pending memories for each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of pending number reduction control is performed in which the variable display time is shortened compared to when the number of pending memories for each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may also do so. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate of selection of a variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in the non-retention number reduction control state. , the average time of the variable display time may be made shorter than when the number of reservations is not in the hold count reduction control state. Further, in the reservation number reduction control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be made shorter than when the reservation number reduction control is not in the state.

Further, the variation pattern may be determined not by a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined, but also by a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 13-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 13-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal jackpot judgment table, each numerical value listed in the left column of Figure 13-8 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value, and in the probability change jackpot judgment table, the values listed in the left column of Figure 13-8 (B) are set as jackpot judgment values. Each numerical value listed in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at variable probability is the same jackpot judgment value as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number of jackpot judgment values (referred to as variable probability jackpot judgment values or second jackpot judgment values) are set than in the variable probability jackpot judgment table. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the jackpot is hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R). ), it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or variable probability jackpot). Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 13-8(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of hitting the jackpot.

FIGS. 13-8(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 13-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 13-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 13-8(B) includes numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, including "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , "10R probability variable jackpot" and corresponding jackpot determination values are set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 13-8(C), a jackpot determination value is set which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 and corresponds to "10R probability variable jackpot".

In addition, as shown in Figures 13-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7". The special pattern 1 variable display section 075F021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 075F022 on the special pattern LED board 075F020 display the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting means such as LEDs lighting up or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display part 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting means such as LEDs lighting or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. It is possible to show the jackpot symbol.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, regarding the jackpot of the second special symbol, the percentage of selection of "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than that of the jackpot type selectable with the first special symbol, and the player There is a high rate of selection of jackpot types that are advantageous for players.

(Production control command)
FIG. 13-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 13-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the production control CPU 101 receives the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of special symbols (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Each of the loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or these commands collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of a 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designation command, the jackpot start 2 designation command, and the jackpot start 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, fluctuation pattern type judgment, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (effect) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 13-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 13-10, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 stores the first pending memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing pending memory information of the first special symbol) or the second pending memory buffer (the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation was stopped (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step 075FS009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 13-8) and a random number for jackpot determination, and determines that it is a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a jackpot determination table (the table in which the numbers on the right side of Figure 13-8 (A) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a table in which the number of jackpot determination values is A normal jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 13-8 (A) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the regular jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 13-8(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 075FS011), the process moves to step 075FS012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times), or the condition that the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any jackpot determination value in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 13-8(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 13-8(C) are used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 13-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, and uses the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013 to determine the pending winnings. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 13-8(B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol is different for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variable jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 13-11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 13-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads Random 2 (a random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) from the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, and selects one of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns by referring to the selected table. decided on.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send the symbol variation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 13-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 13-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), the CPU 103 changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (Step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process ends.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 13-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 13-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbols (step 075FS301). In addition, if the data indicating "1st" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the 1st special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "2nd" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data has been set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process moves to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the RO101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds for the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating the opening mode such as the interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big winning hole in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning hole in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process is ended.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process moves to step 075FS316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). Thereby, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process moves to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variation flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the probability variation flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process in step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIGS. 13-14 are flowcharts showing an example of jackpot release pre-processing. As shown in FIGS. 13-14, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). The corresponding big prize opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 13-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 13-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process moves to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step 075FS503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is +1 (updated and updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passage designation command is sent (step 075FS509), and the process moves to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N at step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. (Step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIGS. 13-16 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 13-16, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (indicating that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the big winning opening control timer. For example, a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process end.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command specified after opening the big winning opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V big prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 13-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process. As shown in FIG. 13-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process moves to step 075FS705. In step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS704), a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), a probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process moves to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and a time saving number counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process moves to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect is set (step 075FS705), and a time-saving number counter is set to 100. (Step 075FS706), and the process moves to Step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Jackpot performance processing)
Next, processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 13-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot production process. As shown in FIG. 13-18, in the jackpot production process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the production control CPU 120 when the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121 stores data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received. It is deleted at a predetermined timing, such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, in accordance with the contents of the process data set next, control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image according to the performance during the round on the image display device 5. . In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 to turn on/blink/turn off. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, etc.) will continue according to the contents of the set process data. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes a process corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance by controlling the performance device. Set the data. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the production control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 in order to encourage the player to play right. Turn on a lighting means such as an LED.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A1 series command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance during the round by controlling the performance device as follows. In order to do so, process data corresponding to the performance during the round is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion production that suggests whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set process data. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) specifying that the big winning hole is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the production control CPU 120 generates process data for executing the V probability variation suggestion production (see Figure 13-41). Set. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) specifying that the big prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 3R of the 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control receives a V notice that foretells that the next 4R will be the V opening round. Set process data to execute the effect (see Figure 13-42). At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A103). A jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after the opening of the big winning hole (A203 command) from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the Aim for V effect (see Figure 13-43). At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot after opening jackpot opening command (A203). The finished jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) after the round during the specified jackpot is set. The Aim for V effect is a guidance display using an image display related to the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V effect, an image is displayed that urges the player to hit the ball to the right so as to fire the game ball aiming at the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V effect, an image may be displayed pointing to the V grand prize opening itself, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed pointing to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. , an image may be displayed that points to the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, it continues to aim for V and executes the production (see Figure 13-44). Set process data for At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A104). A jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (4R in this case), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening specifying command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 performs a V preview performance that foretells that the next 9th round will be the V opening round. Set process data for execution. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A108 A jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after opening the big winning hole (A208 command) from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Aim for the V that makes you want to do something. Set the process data to execute the effect. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the specification command after opening the jackpot (A208 The finished jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 8R), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to aim for V and execute the performance. . At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A109). A jackpot round (in this case, 9R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the V winning prize control CPU 120 executes the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows. Set process data that corresponds to the performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production (see FIG. 13-44). .

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3-based command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the ending performance (FIGS. 13-46 and 13) indicating the end of the jackpot game state. -47)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, and performs various operations. Execute the performance.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Furthermore, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 that has already been explained, below, we will particularly explain the game of the part related to the feature section 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021 becomes a display mode showing the jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds, but the V big jackpot opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, a V prize will not be won. In addition, since the player does not win a V prize, the aim for V effect is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variable suggestion performance that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that it is not a probability variation jackpot but a normal jackpot. Thereafter, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V winning prize is generated, and the normal big prize opening is opened in the subsequent 5th round, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the regular jackpot opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V fixed-variable jackpot that indicates whether or not it is a fixed-variable jackpot is opened. Suggestive performance is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 4th round will be a V open round. In the 4th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability-variable jackpot, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V probability-variable suggestion effect that suggests whether or not it is a probability-variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot, 150 times in the case of 5R probability variable jackpot and 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot and a 10R variable probability jackpot, and when a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state remains in a variable probability state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to be in a time saving state. controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a low probability high base state, and in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a high probability high base state.

Even in the variable probability state or short-time state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 075F030, and the right-hand game display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion effect. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the type of jackpot in the second special figure game is the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Since it is a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big winning hole is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning hole is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, similar to the first win, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion performance by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

[Timing chart of example of processing]
With reference to FIGS. 13-19 to 13-21, the timing of the main processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. FIGS. 13-19 are timing charts showing an example of processing during winning fluctuations. FIG. 13-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. FIG. 13-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Note that FIGS. 13-19 to 13-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 13-19, at t1, when the first special figure game starts as the game ball enters the first starting prize opening, the CPU 103 sends a reservation storage number designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (C1 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol, or displays fluctuating performances (for example, ready-to-reach performances, preview performances, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

For example, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first pending memory number based on the pending memory number designation command, and updates the display of the first pending memory display area 075F005D, or changes the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display section 075F051. or update it. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the gaming state being controlled based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the gaming state. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies that the special symbol will start changing based on the symbol change designation command, and sets the start timing of the performance. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result designation command, and determines a decorative pattern accordingly. Furthermore, based on the variation pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the performance content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach (type of production, etc.).

Thereafter, when the variation of the special symbols stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the subsequent t3, the CPU 103 issues a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare performance, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, as a fanfare performance, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating the jackpot, or outputs a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set process data for In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image that encourages right-handed hitting, and outputs a sound that encourages right-handed hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R, as a right-handed promoting performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-20, after that, when the jackpot round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal jackpot and sends a jackpot open designation command (A101 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance during the round in the 1R.

After that, when the 1st round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to specify after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2nd round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the mid-round performance in the 2R. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability change suggestion performance (see FIG. 13-41) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A102 command).

After that, when the 2nd round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a special winning hole opening designation command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 3rd round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 13-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A103 command).

After that, when the 3rd round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 13-43) based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole (A203 command).

As shown in FIG. 13-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the grand prize opening is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V preview performance (see Figure 13-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command), and then executes the Aim for V performance (see Figure 13-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when a V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see FIG. 13-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a command after opening the big winning hole (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the production control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the production control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command to the production control CPU 120, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating performances (for example, reach performance, preview performance, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuation in the second special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

On the other hand, if the number of pending memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In contrast, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 13-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image with an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the form shown in FIG. Any type of performance may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 13-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting mode of the lamp. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , the right-handed display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off in a blacked-out manner as shown in FIG. 13-22 (A). Expressed as

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are illuminated by white painting as shown in Figure 13-22 (B). It is expressed in the form of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 light up/flash/blink in a manner according to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 13-22(C).

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be explained. FIGS. 13-23 to 13-33 and FIGS. 13-38 to 13-50 are explanatory diagrams showing performance modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the change in the special symbols of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command) to the performance control CPU 120. ), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with fluctuations in the first special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 13-23 (b1) to 13-24 (b3) as a reservation storage number specification command (C1 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-23 (b1) to FIG. 13-24 (b3) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (b2), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect.

Thereafter, when the special symbols stop changing, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 13-24 (b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 and a right-hand hit display lighting. Send a command (FD-related command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. In addition, the production control CPU 120 inputs the data of each production shown in Figures 13-24 (c1) to 13-38 (d2) into a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command). Set based on. In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-24 (c1) to FIG. 13-38 (d2) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

Here, the fanfare performance will be explained in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare performance includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed driving promotion part. The blessing part is a performance part in which a performance to congratulate the jackpot is performed, and as described later in FIG. 13-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting mode congratulating the jackpot. The name display part is an effect part that not only informs the player that a jackpot round has started by notifying the name of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred, but also informs the player of the type of jackpot gaming state that has occurred. -24 (c2) and (c3), as described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. The right-handed driving promotion part is a production part that encourages the player to play right-handed, and uses image displays of characters and figures as described later in Figures 13-24 (c4) to 13-33 (c29). A big right-handed hitting promotion performance is performed to encourage the player to hit right-handed. The performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is determined, and then receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is executed until the normal jackpot is opened and the jackpot round starts.

As shown in Figure 13-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!") is displayed as a celebration part in the fanfare performance. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that it is displayed on the device 5, a sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. or In addition, as a performance to promote right-handed hitting, a small image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed") is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 to promote right-handed hitting. The performance is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and can display a predetermined image in each layer. As shown in Figure 13-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion performance is an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!!") character image) is displayed in a layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound that encourages right-handed batting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as a performance to promote right-handed batting, the lighting modes of right-handed batting display section 075F030 and right-handed batting display section 075F055 are designed to encourage right-handed batting. (in this example, it lights up). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-based command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD-based command), and lights up the right-hitting display section 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD-based command), and at the same time lights up the small-right-based hitting promotion production based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0-based command). An image consisting of figures and characters in , and an image congratulating the jackpot are displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the player on hitting the jackpot. In other words, first, the lamps light up in the order of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055, and then an image consisting of figures and letters to promote small right-handed hitting, and an image congratulating the jackpot. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the lighting in the right-handed display section 075F030 and the right-handed display section 075F055, determine the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. will be carried out until At this time, first, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display light-off designation command along with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display section 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-hander display section 075F055 based on the received right-hander display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-hander promotion effect based on the received background designation command. Upon completion, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect matches the lighting period of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055, so that the player can control the right-handed hitting period. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in Figure 13-24 (c2), part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, one of the character images of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is used as the name display part in the fanfare performance. "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of a jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of a jackpot. The lighting mode may change.

As shown in Figure 13-25 (c3), following Figure 13-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image (in this example "BONUS!!" of the character image "CHANCE BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right-handed hitting promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance starting at the next timing. After that, from Fig. 13-24 (c4) to Fig. 13-33 (c29), a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed batting") are displayed as an effect to promote right-handed batting. ) is displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5 to promote a big right-handed hit.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 13-34 to 13-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the performance control CPU 120 emits a guide light to prompt the player to hit the ball to the right by moving the light emitting location of the frame lamp. In this embodiment, a light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. For example, among a plurality of lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lit lamp is located is called a light-emitting location; A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is turned off) is located is not called a light emitting location. In other examples, a light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness; for example, among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. A location where a lamp that is lit at a luminance lower than the luminance of a lamp located at the light emitting location is located may not be referred to as a light emitting location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the performance control CPU 120 will be specifically explained.

FIG. 13-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 13-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, panel left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the performance time of each of the fanfare performance and the big right hitting promotion performance is defined. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then executes a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, since the big right-handed hit promotion performance is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec big right-handed hit promotion performance twice. Become.

FIG. 13-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 13-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is subdivided into each time of the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect, and is referenced in each time period. A grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right-handed driving promotion effect, the common grandchild table W11 is designated for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. Regarding the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the big right-handed hit promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

FIGS. 13-36 and 13-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 13-36 shows data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 13-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all the lamps are Data indicating that the light is off (0x000000) is specified. Note that in the grandchild table, data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 13-2 are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In addition, in Figure 13-36, in order to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are used. In contrast, a dashed circle is attached.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T1, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T2, and then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T3. The second lamp is lit, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is first turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, and then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L turns off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T53 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T54 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used to turn on the light is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec left, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final turn off time is 1000 msec (which is longer than the remaining time). T57). Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If you use the grandchild table W11 in which the data described above is stored, as shown in Figures 13-25 (c4) to 13-32 (c24), starting from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L, , up to the 8th lamp of frame right lamp 075F009R, the frame lamps light up in seven colors in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 13-37 shows data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 13-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is specified at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is specified. In addition, in the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, among the letters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X) Data is specified for each of the following. In addition, in FIG. 13-37, in order to clearly show the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown. ) is marked with a dashed circle.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T4, and then the movable lamp 9d is turned on at T5. The lamp on the right X of 9d lights up. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is first turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Lights out. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec remaining, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final light off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. (T57). Furthermore, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

If you use the grandchild table K11 that stores the data described above, the fourth and third lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L will be changed as shown in Figures 13-25 (c4) to 13-32 (c24) While the movable lamp 9d is lit, the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the left X of the movable lamp 9d lights up at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, and then the middle X and right X lamps turn on. When lit, each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and at the same timing that the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Lights out. As a result, the movable lamps 9d light up in seven colors starting from the left X lamp, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right-handed hit promotion effect using the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 13-37 shows data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 13-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600,000 msec compared to 330 msec for lighting, and that data is for turning off the light. Data (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one pattern color change. ing. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacker lamp 9c for 280 ns each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec and performs a predetermined Repeating color changes in a pattern (for example, seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 320 msec for lighting, and the data for turning off (0x000000) is specified. There is.

When the big right hit promotion performance is started, the production control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at 280 nsec intervals for 1350 msec. By referring to the table A11c multiple times, the attacker lamp 9c is caused to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then, by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the last 320 msec, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off. As a result, as shown in Figures 13-25 (c4) to 13-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and soon the 8th lamp of the right frame lamp 075F009R lights up. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps turn off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then the attacker lamp 9c will turn off. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the light goes out at the beginning, repeats a predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, and then goes out, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off three times. By creating a scenario in stages and repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for repeating the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle, there is no need to prepare data for all times from the beginning to the end of the 2000 msec lighting. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated portion. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 13-25 (c4), the presentation mode of the big right-handed hitting promotion performance executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 13-25 (c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-25 (c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-26 (c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable lamp 9d, the left X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-26 (c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-26 (c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (c15), on the image display device 5, a character image of "RIGHT" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp on the left side of the frame 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. Note that from then on, the attacker lamp 9c repeats turning on and turning off (that is, blinks). The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (c16), on the image display device 5, the character image "right" continues to be displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, a character image "Right-handed" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, a character image "Right-handed" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right-handed hitter" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right-handed hitter" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the panel right lamp 075F009F goes out. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c also turns off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. This completes the series of first big right-handed hit promotion effects.

As shown in FIG. 13-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion performance starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In addition, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance. As a result, when transitioning to the jackpot round after the big right-handed hit promotion performance ends, the BGM (sound according to the background of the jackpot round) during the jackpot round and the sound in the big right-handed promotion performance will not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 13-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hitting promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as the first big right hitting promotion performance. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed hitting promotion performance uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance, and is a performance that encourages the player to play right-handed hitting in a manner that is more emphasized than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance. be. Therefore, by executing the big right-handed hit promotion performance during the fanfare performance, it is possible to encourage the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the first big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds (for example, a sound effect for playing right-handed) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, thereby effectively appealing to the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed hitting, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, so that the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that is not output. can be made so as not to interfere with

In addition, in the big right-handed driving promotion effect, arrow images and character images are displayed in a manner that gradually appears in stages, and moreover, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. This effect is more flashy than the effect shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2) that displays the name image of the jackpot game state. For example, the character images in the big right-handed promotion effect appear one character at a time, but all the character images in the name image in the jackpot game state appear at once. Furthermore, regarding the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion performance, the character image in the name image of the jackpot game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the effect promoting a big right-handed hit is longer than the execution time of the effect displaying the name image. Thereby, after the name image of the jackpot game state is displayed and the player is informed of the jackpot, it is possible to notify the player by emphasizing right-handed hitting by the big right-handed promoting performance.

The attacker lamp 9c is the place that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and also blinks. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the target area. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without blinking.

In the following example, the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability-variable jackpot occurs will be explained. Although the number of rounds is different for the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, other performance aspects are the same as for the 5R fixed-variable jackpot. Furthermore, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V preview performance and the V prize winning performance are not executed, but the other performance aspects are the same as the 5R probability-variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 13-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right-handed promotion effect ends, the switch to the jackpot round occurs as shown in FIG. 13-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the arrow image and the character image "Right hit!" fade out, resulting in a gradual decrease in visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes completely white. Note that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. As described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of performance data up to the stage shown in FIG. 13-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R. Note that the production control CPU 120 sets the data of each production shown in FIGS. 13-39 (d3) to 13-40 (e4) based on the large prize opening designation command (A101 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-39 (d3) to FIG. 13-40 (e4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from a state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. It should be noted that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed at the top right of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade in" and "fade out" will be specifically explained. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in image display called "transition." "Transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-ins and fade-outs, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade in" is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, fade-in involves changing the transparency (also called transmittance) of an object (image) from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0). % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually change the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually lowered from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, A fade-in is not a fade-in if it does not gradually change the rate) to a lower value. Note that when changing opacity (also referred to as opacity) rather than transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned % value is reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree that is higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, fade-out involves changing the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 seconds, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparency, It is not a fade-out if the rate (rate) does not gradually increase. Note that when changing the opacity (opacity) rather than the transparency (transparency), in fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparent By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% when the transparency (rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the text "Right hit!!" Make the image transparent in stages and make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 13-38 (d2), only the white image on the second layer of the screen located further back than the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. Then, as shown in Figure 13-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is reduced to 0%. By gradually lowering the background image to , the background image during the jackpot round becomes gradually opaque and easily visible (fade-in). As a result, the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen is shown to the player.

Note that as a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade". For example, cross-fading is achieved by fading out the first layer of a screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located further back than the first layer. , in appearance, is a method in which the first layer of the screen is shown and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is is shown once during the transition from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, which is different from a technique such as cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the above-mentioned transition is executed, the image that promotes small right-handed hits displayed at the top right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, the player cannot completely see the image promoting small right-handed shots, or the player The player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when the player can see the image promoting small right-handed hitting a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in Figure 13-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in Figure 13-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Note that a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Note that, as described above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e2), during 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and an image ( arrows and text) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e3), when the 1st round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A201 command) to the production control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 13-40 (e4), between rounds, the grand prize opening usually remains closed, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2R based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the production control CPU 120 sets the data of each production shown in FIGS. 13-41 (e5) to 13-42 (e8) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-41 (e5) to FIG. 13-42 (e8) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, a text image of "PUSH!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B, overlapping the background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 13-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability change suggestion performance, a V An image of the text "Success!!" is displayed to notify you of a guaranteed jackpot. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e8), when the 2nd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A202 command) to specify after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e9), between rounds, the grand prize opening usually remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a message " A text image "Success!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 13-42 (e10) to 13-43 (e12) based on the large prize opening designation command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-42 (e10) to FIG. 13-43 (e12) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened and the V preview effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a character image and a text image "Catch V in the next round!!" are displayed together with a character image so as to overlap a background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V preview effect continues to be performed, and is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, overlapping the background image corresponding to the in-round effect, together with the character image. A text image "Catch the V in the next round!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right-hand hit is subsequently displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A203 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. On the other hand, based on the command from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect aiming for V during the rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), between rounds, the Aim for V effect is executed with the grand prize opening remaining closed, that is, with the game ball unable to enter the grand prize opening. Specifically, V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large prize ball device 075F007B), which is the target (location) that the player is made to aim at by hitting right, is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image according to the performance during the round. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a text image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the Aim for V effect, by using the image display regarding the V big winning hole, it is possible to urge the player to hit the ball to the right so that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 13-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the large prize opening designation command (A104 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-44 (e14) to FIG. 13-44 (e15) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened and the Aim for V effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim for the V-big prize opening by hitting the ball to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e15), during the 4R, an aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When a game ball enters the V big prize opening and a V prize is generated, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 13-44 (e16) to 13-45 (e18) based on the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-44 (e16) to FIG. 13-45 (e18) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, a message " V'' image is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V grand prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A204 command) to specify after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize opening and the normal big prize opening remain closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 13-45 (e19) to 13-46 (e21) based on the large prize opening designation command (A105 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-45 (e19) to FIG. 13-46 (e21) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (e20), during 5R, an in-round effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, an image of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. (arrow and text) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 13-46 (f1) to 13-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-46 (f1) to FIG. 13-47 (f4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 that allows you to select a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f2), during the ending effect, a name image (in this example, a character image of "Yumemu RUSH!!") indicating the name of the variable state is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the character image. displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f3), during the ending effect, an immersion suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to get addicted to it. Pachinko is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation." Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. In addition, at the time of consecutive winnings, a game result image showing the result of the game in the jackpot game state (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but when the first hit is Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-47 (f4), a forgetting prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent forgetting to take out a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending effect is finished, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 inputs the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 13-48 (g1) and (g2) into a pending storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command. (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (g1) and (g2) in FIGS. 13-48 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit is continuously displayed at the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g2), the second special symbol stops changing and a losing symbol is displayed. At this time as well, the image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of losing symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of the losing symbol.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command) to the production control CPU 120. , a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). Note that the effect control CPU 120 sends the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 13-48 (g3) to 13-49 (g5) to a pending storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 13-48 (g3) to FIG. 13-49 (g5) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g4), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during jackpot fluctuations. The group preview effect refers to objects such as characters appearing in stages or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the ready-to-reach symbols, and then disappearing to make it difficult to see the reach symbols. This is an effect that makes a matching pattern (for example, 777, etc.) appear. Even if a preview effect that makes it difficult to see the symbols in such a reach mode is executed, the image of the small right hit promotion effect ( arrows and text) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of effect images" means that due to the display of effect images such as group previews, the player cannot completely see the image of the effect promoting small right-handed hits, or the player is affected by the display of effect images such as group previews. Players' visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when they can see the image of the effect a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the same as the effect image. It can be said that the results are not affected by the display.

When the variation of the special symbols stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 13-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R variable jackpot) occurs as a result of the stoppage of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. Note that since the right-handed hitting promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed hitting display lighting command (FD type command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 13-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (h1) and (h2) in FIGS. 13-50 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (h1), as a fanfare performance, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yattane!!") is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), after the fanfare performance has started, a name image (in this example, a character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed on the image display device 5. , a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, since the big right-hitting promotion performance has already been executed when the special symbol 1 is won, the big right-hitting promotion performance is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in Figures 13-25 (c4) to 13-32 (c24), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, and furthermore, , the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R.

As shown in FIG. 13-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

After that, although not shown, various performances such as V preview performance, Aim for V performance, and V winning performance are executed during the round as shown in Figures 13-40 to 13-46, and eventually, when the jackpot round ends, , the ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 13-46 and 13-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-48, control is again made to the variable probability state after the jackpot game state. In this series of games, in the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed, as well as the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display parts 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-hit display light off designation command is sent from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-handed promotion effect in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and also erases the right-handed hitting display part 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the sections 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player will play left-handed again in the normal state.

[Performance mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when recovering from power outage]
FIG. 13-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the fanfare performance due to one special drawing win. The power outage shown in FIG. 13-51 is assumed to be power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during a fanfare performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-20. .

As shown in FIG. 13-51, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 13-51). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 13-24 (c2)) state), a state in which only the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-28 (c14)), and a state in which the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is displayed together with "Right-handed hitting!" !” character image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23)), if a power outage occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, when the power is turned on, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A101 command), a performance image during 1R as shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. Additionally, an image congratulating you on hitting the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!"), and a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!") After the power is turned on, all of the images, including the arrow image in the big right-handed driving promotion performance, and the character image ``Right-handed!!'' added to the arrow image in the big right-handed game promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion performance is executed or before the big right hit promotion performance is completed, the small right hit promotion performance will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, immediately after recovering from a power outage, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right, and if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right, he or she is unable to enter the game ball into the winning hole. This makes it possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIG. 13-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during one round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 13-52 assumes a power outage 2 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-20.

As shown in FIG. 13-52, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance during 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 13-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to one that is displayed at 0pt after recovery from a power outage, but may be made so that the point cannot be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 13-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the round after the first round of jackpot at the time of special drawing 1 win. The power outage shown in Figure 13-53 is the power outage 3 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 13-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 13-53, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 13-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 13-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 13-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot when the first special drawing is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 13-54 is assumed to be power outage 4 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-20.

As shown in FIG. 13-54, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the V probability change suggestion effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-41 (e7)), the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) and jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 13-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the player wins the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 13-55 is the power outage 5 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 13-55, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-42 (e9)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 13-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) and jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 13-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of jackpot when the player wins the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 13-56 is the power outage 6 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 3R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 13-56, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-43 (e13)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A104 command) after returning from a power outage, the production control The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the big winning opening designation command (A103 command) and jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), and executes the effect to aim for V as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e14). It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the V-winning slot in the next round. can.

FIG. 13-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the 4th round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 13-57 is assumed to be power outage 7 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-21.

As shown in FIG. 13-57, an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 13-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. If a power outage occurs in a state where is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, when the power is turned on, "Recovering..." will be displayed. The character image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), a performance image during 5R as shown in FIG. 13-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it. Furthermore, as in 4R, if a power outage occurs while a small right hit promotion performance is being executed along with the V target performance, or as shown in Figure 13-51 mentioned above, a small right hit promotion performance and a small right hit promotion performance may occur. In the case where a power outage occurs while a right-handed hit promotion performance is being executed, the common thing is that after returning from the power outage, the aim for V performance and the large right-handed hit promotion performance are not executed, while the small right-handed hit promotion performance is performed. is running at least. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least encourage the player to play right-handed immediately after recovering from a power outage, in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 13-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the 4th round of the jackpot at the time of the special drawing 1 win. The power outage shown in FIG. 13-58 is the power outage 8 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 13-58, when a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 13-45 (e18)) between rounds after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 13-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 13-59 assumes a power outage 9 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-21.

As shown in FIG. 13-59, a state in which an image corresponding to the in-round effect during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 13-46 (e20)), or a state after the end of 5R (in FIG. -46 (state e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command), the production control CPU 120 executes the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command). Based on this, an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 13-46 (f1) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the minimum, players will be able to It can encourage players to hit right-handed, and it can prevent them from forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 13-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the ending presentation at the time of winning the special drawing 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 13-60 is assumed to be a power outage 10 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-21. .

As shown in FIG. 13-60, in the ending performance, an image for selecting a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 13-46 (f1)), a character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probability change state is displayed together with the image on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 13-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the addictive suppression notification effect, and a game result in the jackpot game state are shown. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 13-47 (f3)), and a forgetting prevention image for preventing players from forgetting to take out cards owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power outage occurs in any of the displayed states (the state shown in Figure 13-47 (f4)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image "Restoring..." will be displayed when the power is turned on. is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, if there is a pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , the display result specification command (8C series command), and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, the pending storage number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command), the An image display device 5 displays an effect image corresponding to the variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103. Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specification command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as a decorative pattern and small pattern) stopped. .

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so the player will at least be encouraged to hit right right after the power is restored. This prevents as much as possible the players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the second starting prize slot in a variable state after a jackpot game state. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, technical effects obtained by various configurations of the feature portion 075F described above will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)), and A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-hand hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)) and an image related to the specific area. A third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, while ending the first guidance display, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended). (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, the third guidance display is performed while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), aim for V. (a part that displays an image corresponding to the performance and continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion performance),
Thereafter, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area changes from the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued). As shown in 13-44 (e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), aim for V. (a part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is ended),
While performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hitting suggestion effect) 13-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 13-51 and 13-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area. A third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 13-38 (d1), (d2) ), where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed shot suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closure of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, in Figure 13-43 As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 13-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guide display is ended while the second guide display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44 (e16), (The part where the image display corresponding to the aiming effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-handed hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-handed hitting suggestion effect) 13-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed, but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 13-51 and 13-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area. A third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-38). As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a command after the end of 3R (for example, a command after opening the big prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in Figure 13-43). As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command)), the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 13-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-44). As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hitting suggestion effect) 13-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 13-51 and 13-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. After that, it is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player about excessively hitting the right by making the player recognize it surely, and then continuing the performance promoting the small right-handed hit while ending the big right-handed hitting promotion performance. In addition, the Aim for V effect to make people aim for the V grand prize opening will be executed from the time when the V grand prize opening is still closed, and will continue as it is even after the V grand prize opening is opened. It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming for the big winning hole, and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, by ending the Aim for V effect after a V win occurs and the V big win opening is closed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notifications from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right-handed promotion performance is continuously executed, so players are encouraged to always play right-handed from before the V-big winning opening opens to after the V-winning occurs. can be encouraged. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right. In addition, when a power outage occurs while displaying an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect and the power is restored from the power outage, it also corresponds to the Aim for V effect. If a power outage occurs while the image display and the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored from the power outage, the text image "Restoring..." and the small Since an image promoting right-handed playing is displayed, even if a power outage occurs, the player can be at least encouraged to continue playing right-handed in subsequent games.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. (a process for executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-24 (c25)). image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in c1)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting promotion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting promotion performance shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-38 (c26)),
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1) to FIG. 13-46 (e21), the jackpot is (The part where the image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is not displayed during the round, while the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is continued),
In the special state (for example, probability change state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is finished, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the jackpot as shown in FIGS. 13-48 and 13-49). part that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect in a variable probability state),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 13-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 13-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect) (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5)) (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. To ensure that a player is aware of excessive hitting to the right, and during the subsequent jackpot round, to end a big right hitting promotion performance while continuing a small right hitting promotion performance, thereby not appealing to a player that he hits the right excessively. I can do it. In addition, by continuing to perform the small right-handed hit promotion performance even in the variable probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to encourage the player to always play right. Furthermore, after a jackpot occurs, the small right hit promotion effect will not be affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the jackpot round after the fanfare effect is executed, and the jackpot game state will not be affected. Since the small right-handed hit promotion performance is not affected by the image display such as the group preview performance performed in the probability change state or time-saving state after the game ends, the player can always be encouraged to play the right hit. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-25 to 13-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed driving promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is outputted in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 13-32 (c26) to 13-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. (For example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous jackpot with 2 special symbols, the corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R. part that does not output sound depending on the mode).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-25 to 13-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed driving promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means includes:
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is outputted in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 13-25 (c4) to Fig. 13-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 13-32 (c26) to 13-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-39 (e1), after the start of the jackpot round, the sound during the round is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guide means is configured to control the display result of the variable display in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state). When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp will display a large right-handed hit promotion effect) (the part that does not light up depending on the situation).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after turning off the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-25 to 13-33, after turning off the light, (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotional effect)
The sound output means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the guide light emission (for example, FIG. 13-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 13-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the speaker 8L and 8R will output a big right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 13-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 13-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 13-25 to FIG. 13- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means is
After the light emitting means is turned off, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-25 to 13-33, after the light is once turned off, it corresponds to a big right-handed drive promotion effect). (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display)
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp responds to the big right hit promotion effect. (The part that does not light up depending on the mode)

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-handed driving promotion effects shown in FIGS. 13-25 to 13-33 has a larger character image than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2). The characters appear one by one in stages, take a long time to execute, and are displayed in an emphasized manner. With this, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should play right-handed.

(6) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, but the second one Regarding the subsequent right-handed driving promotion, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For example, if the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed player promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed players. Also, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onwards. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting only includes sound data linked to the first right-handed promoting. As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(7) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means includes:
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, and then In conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right, but regarding the final promotion to hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right. For example, when a frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed players based on the sound data for the right-handed players. and outputs a sound in conjunction with the promotion of the third right-handed hit. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting includes only sound data linked to the first and second right-handed promoting. Note that the sound data may include only sound data linked to one time's right-handed promotion, and the production control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits, and the production control CPU 120 may execute the sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits once. . As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is constituted by a plurality of lamps, and emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, Fig. 13-25 (c3) As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps in the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion effect, so that the player is encouraged to hit right more easily and effectively. I can do it.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 13-34) that defines the execution time of the guide light emission, and a child table (for example, the grandchild table that defines the data referred to by the light emitting means). , the child table shown in FIG. 13-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIGS. 13-36 and 13-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and specifies the grandchild table in which lighting data is specified by referring to the child table. It is specified and turned on/blinking/off by referring to the grandchild table. Thereby, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting manner.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit the guide light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. Thereby, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guide means emits the guide light by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIGS. 13-25 to 13-13). As shown in 33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-25 to 13-33, by lighting up each lamp included in the frame lamp in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area, a big right-handed hit promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp performs a big right-handed hit promotion effect while lighting up in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to play right-handed.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 13-38 (d1) ~ As shown in FIG. 13-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 13-38 (d1) to 13-39 (d4), the small right-handed promotion performance involves switching the background image by fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare performance to the jackpot round. It continues without being affected by the display. Thereby, even if the fanfare performance is switched to the jackpot round by switching the display of the background image, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting the ball to the right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the preview effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, in FIG. -49 (as shown in g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group preview effect).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 13-49 (g5), the small right hit promotion effect affects the display in the preview effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot advantageous state. continues without being affected. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the preview effect, the arrow images and text images in the small right-handed promotion effect will continue to be displayed without hindering their visibility. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2) So, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a manner that corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not light up).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 13-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the mode corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect is from speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first winning. , the sound is not output, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothered by the promotion of right-handed play being frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the above-described feature section 075F will be explained.

(About turning off the lights before the execution of the big right-handed hit promotion performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-25 (c3), after all the lamps in the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the big right-handed driving promotion performance (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is subsequently lit in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-38 (d1) to 13-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare performance to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are used. Although switching display of background images has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a production effect such as a whiteout, in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare production and the jackpot round, or a blackout, in which a pure black screen is inserted, may be used.

Furthermore, the switching display during the jackpot round may include displaying a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (song), and switching to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen.

Furthermore, the switching display during the jackpot round may include displaying a mode selection screen for selecting a production mode, and switching to a background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the jackpot round, it is sufficient to ensure that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-49 (g5), as the display of the performance image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state, the image display based on the group preview performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, to display the performance image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state, you may use a whiteout effect that inserts a pure white screen during the reach effect, or a blackout effect that inserts a pure black screen. You may use the effect of a pseudo-continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or you can make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may also use a production effect that makes you feel In any case, even if a special performance display is performed in a probability change state after a jackpot game ball state, it is sufficient to prevent the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance from being affected.

(About the production aiming for V)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and as an effect of aiming for V, As shown in FIG. 13-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V large prize opening was displayed. However, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using image display related to a specific area, is not limited to this, and the image display in the Aim for V effect does not only point to the V grand prize opening itself, but also refers to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a route leading to the V-sized winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V-sized winning opening located upstream of the V-sized winning opening.

(About the promotion of big right-handed hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then a text image of "Right hit!!" appears. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a text image of "Right-handed!!" may appear first, and then a graphic image of an arrow may appear. In addition, the image display for promoting a large right-handed hit, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display for promoting a small right-handed hit, which is an example of the second guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image. However, it may be composed of only arrow images or only character images.

(About advantageous conditions)
In this embodiment, the periods shown in FIGS. 13-24 (c1) to 13-47 (f4) (from t3 in FIG. 13-20 to t16 in FIG. ), but the example is not limited to this. For example, the period of "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare performance period, that is, the period shown in Figure 13-39 (d3) to Figure 13-47 (f4) (t4 in Figure 13-20 to Figure 13-21 (up to t16). Further, the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance may be performed during a period in which a symbol in which a jackpot occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About the promotion of right-handed hitting in case of first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot with one special figure, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the frame lamp is outputted in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot in one special drawing, the aspects of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the jackpot for one special drawing is a variable jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the big right-handed hit promotion performance. The sound may be output in different ways. In addition, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp will not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R will not emit sound in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect. You may also choose not to output it.

(About the right-handed promotion promotion in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special drawings)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner according to the big right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a big right-handed hit, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a large right-handed hit.

Further, depending on the type of consecutive winnings in the special figure 2 winnings, the aspect of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the consecutive winnings on 2 special drawings are a guaranteed strange jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the big right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, if the consecutive winning of the special figure 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect from speakers 8L and 8R. You may also choose not to output any sound. If the consecutive winnings on special drawings 2 are a guaranteed strange jackpot, unlike the first winning on special drawings 1, the frame lamp will appear in a special manner according to the big right-handed promotion effect (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ) may be turned on, or the speakers 8L and 8R may output sound in a special manner in accordance with the effect of promoting a big right-handed hit. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a big right-hitting promotion effect may be performed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) that is different from the first hit for one special figure. .

(About the third information display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guide display using the image display regarding the specific area, an image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round in the variable probability jackpot is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image may be displayed that prompts the player to fire the game ball at the second starting prize opening in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, or a variable winning ball may be displayed as the third guidance display. Displaying an image that prompts the player to shoot a game ball at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending performance is finished, the production control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result command, etc. Based on the reception of the specified command (8C series command) and the variable pattern specification command (81 series command), an arrow image pointing to the second starting winning hole and the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is displayed along with the message "Aim!" ” may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the figures and character images in the small right-handed driving promotion effect may continue to be displayed.

(About time-saving state control by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned features and modifications, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor to determine the number of time saving times.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when drawing time-saving symbols using structures, when the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when drawing a time-saving symbol, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time-saving state, the game state must go through the jackpot gaming state, so in order to encourage the player to play right in the time-saving state. The big right hit promotion performance and the small right hit promotion performance could be performed during the fanfare performance performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if a losing symbol as described above is used as a time-saving symbol, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure time for executing the large right-handed hit promotion performance and the small right-handed hit promotion performance from the time the symbol is displayed until the time-saving state is controlled. Therefore, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be performed using the method described below.

For example, if the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of losing symbols that are not time-saving symbols stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the variation of losing symbols that are time-saving symbols stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. During this time, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of the time-saving state control. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 uses, as a loss specification command, a display result specification command that indicates a normal loss variation to which no time saving is given, as well as a loss variation for time saving to which a time saving is given. It is sufficient to prepare a display result designation command indicating , and send the production control command to the production control CPU 120 by using both commands depending on whether or not it is a losing variation of the time saving symbol. Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation, and sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation. may be set to 30 seconds.

The production control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time-saving state (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 during the 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and also displays the time-saving state control from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding manner, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the time saving state control. A part of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a part of a fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c2).

Similar to the example shown in Figure 13-24 (c1), even before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") created by this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, an image congratulating the time-saving state (for example, "O ``Congratulations!!'' (character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the time-saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light is turned on to congratulate the time-saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to match the game effect lamp 9. In addition, as a small right-handed hitting promotion performance, a small right-handed hitting promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and text (letters "right-handed hitting") is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the image display device 5, A sound that encourages right-handed hitting may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that encourages right-handed hitting. Note that the image in the small right-handed driving promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both encourage the player to play right-handed over the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in Fig. 13-24 (c2), the small right hit promotion effect is continued while the name image ("Time Saving RUSH") is displayed due to the time-saving fanfare effect, and then, after that, as shown in Fig. 13-24 After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), the big right hit is promoted during the time-saving fanfare performance as in the examples shown in FIGS. 13-25 (c4) to 13-38 (c26). You may also perform a performance. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed hitting promotion performance, the gaming state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed hitting promotion performance may be continued, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 13-48 to 13-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time that is longer than the symbol confirmation time for a losing symbol that is not a time-saving symbol, it is possible to make a big difference in the symbol confirmation time. It is possible to perform a hitting promotion performance and a small right hitting promotion performance.

In addition, in the case where the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, it is not limited to the one that uses the symbol confirmation time to execute the large right-handed promotion performance or the small right-handed promotion production as described above, but also the loss pattern that gives time savings. If there is a pending memory corresponding to a loss for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the symbols have been determined, in the next game (variation), a time-saving fanfare performance is executed, as well as a large right hit promotion performance and a small right strike promotion performance. A hitting promotion performance may also be performed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after a game in which a losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, a time-saving fanfare performance is performed instead of executing a performance that makes you expect a hit, such as a reach performance or a preview performance. At the same time as this, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbols have been determined is a jackpot, then the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 13-24 (c1) is executed, so the time-saving fanfare performance is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbol with time saving is confirmed, the time saving fanfare performance is executed with the symbol not changing, and the big right hit promotion performance and the small A right-handed hitting promotion performance may be performed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration performance from being executed and hindering the time-saving fanfare performance, the CPU 103 does not send the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. . Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the time-saving fanfare performance without executing the customer waiting demonstration performance.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to a characteristic part may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning slot 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 21 Gate switch 22A First starting port switch 22B Second starting port switch 23 Count switch 25A First hold indicator 25B Second hold indicator 25C Normal figure hold indicator 30 Ball operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passing gates 81, 82 Solenoid 100 Game control Microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102,122 RAM
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 123 Display control section

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
Display means;
The display means is capable of displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The display means is
The first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed when a start effect regarding the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result in the normal state. , in a subsequent period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is performed;
Displaying the second guidance in the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
not performing the first guide display when the start effect is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result in the special state;
It is possible to display a specific display in the first layer,
A specific character display can be displayed on a second layer on the front side of the first layer,
The specific character display includes a first specific character display whose display position is not changed during display, and a second specific character display whose display position is changed during display,
The first specific character display includes a first specific area surrounded by lines forming characters,
The second specific character display includes a second specific area surrounded by lines forming characters,
The specific display is not visible from the first specific area of the first specific character display,
A gaming machine in which the specific display is visible from the second specific area of the second specific character display.

Images